JP6783831B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

A plurality of timers (first numerical value display area, second numerical value display area) are displayed on the conventional game machine, and an effect (special effect) is executed when the value of any of the timers becomes 0 (specific value). (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-85082

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because no effect targeting the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area is executed.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine of means A is
It is a game machine that can play games
A display means having at least a first numerical value display area and a second numerical value display area,
A predetermined effect in which a numerical value is updated to a specific value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area, a special effect for suggesting the predetermined effect, and the first numerical value display area. It is provided with an effect that makes it difficult to see at least one of the second numerical display areas, and an effect executing means that can execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
As the special effect, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area.
After starting the difficult-to-see effect, the numerical value in the numerical display area of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area, which has been made difficult to see due to the difficult-to-see effect, becomes the specific value. Finished the difficult-to-see production,
Specific control means that can execute specific control according to the set value,
It is further provided with a configurable state control means capable of controlling the set value into a settable state.
According to this feature, the game entertainment can be improved.
In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine of the means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
At least the first numerical value display area (for example, the interface area 18SG005I including the normal timer and the remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and the second numerical value display area (for example, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer) and A display means (for example, an image display device 5) having a modified example 156SG-1 with a display area for the number of remaining games in the additional zone, and
A predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect, a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modified example 156SG-1) in which a numerical value is updated to a specific value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area. A portion in which the number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone) and a special effect (for example, FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect are shown. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, the portion that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) and CPU120 for production control) and
With
As the special effect, the effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect for the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the period of the normal timer effect, the period of the special timer effect, the period of the normal timer effect, and the period of the special timer effect. As shown in the part where the total value is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B and the modification 156-1, the number of additional games is the number of remaining games of ART and the additional zone. The part to be added to both the number of remaining games)
further,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Gaming machine hand stage 2, a gaming machine according to the means 1,
As the special effect, the effect executing means can execute an effect in which only one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area is a suggestion target (for example, shown in FIG. 10-22). As shown above, the part in which the period of the normal timer effect is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B and the period of the special timer effect are set as the first as shown in FIG. 10-23. The part notified by the timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B)
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to the numerical display area which is the suggestion target of the special effect.

Gaming machine Hand stage 3, a gaming machine according to the means 1 or means 2,
As the special effect, the effect executing means has already executed the effect suggesting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, the second timer effect execution suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-26 (F) of the modified example 155SG-2). It is characterized in that an effect suggesting a special change in a numerical value in a predetermined effect (for example, an additional effect shown in FIG. 10-26 (C) of the modified example 155SG-2) can be executed.
According to this feature, the player can draw attention to the special production.

Gaming machine Hand stage 4, a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 3,
A motion detecting means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting motion is provided.
The effect executing means can execute an operation corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on the detection result of the motion detecting means.
The first numerical value display area has a first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer effect to the combination of reach of the decorative symbols) as the predetermined effect. It is a display area in which a numerical value becomes the specific value when the elapse has passed.
In the second numerical value display area, as the predetermined effect, a cut-in effect is performed from the start of the special timer effect as shown in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B)), which is a longer period than the first period. It is a display area in which a numerical value becomes the specific value when 45 seconds or 55 seconds until the start is elapsed.
During the second period, the ratio of the operation corresponding effect being executed is higher than that of the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect. Is executed, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game during the predetermined production.

Gaming machine Hand stage 5 is a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 4,
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, a concealment effect shown in FIG. 10-28 as a modification 156SG-2) that changes at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area to a difficult-to-see state. ,
When at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area is in the difficult-to-see state, the numerical value in the numerical value display area in the difficult-to-see state is not set as the specific value (for example, a modification). As shown in FIG. 10-28 as 156SG-2, the portion where the concealment of the short timer is terminated before the short timer is timered out).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a predetermined effect and a change effect can be preferably executed.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following means. Conventionally, there have been proposed game machines that display a title that informs the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428. However, it is desired to enhance the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1 according to another aspect is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means J2 is the gaming machine of means J1.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J3 is the gaming machine of the means J1 or the means J2.
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

The gaming machine of the means J4 is the gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J3.
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J5 is the gaming machine of means J4.
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J6 is the gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J5.
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J7 is the gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J6.
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 8-10 (E), 8-11 (I). )),
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and 8-11 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J8 is the gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J7.
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. Display by) and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062, etc. displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)) can be displayed. Further provided with means (for example, an image display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d). Etc.) can be displayed, and a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), etc.).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately control the addition of the gaming medium when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that appropriately executes control regarding the addition of a game medium.

The game machine of means A1
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) that grants the game medium based on the signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
With
When the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037). 2. The payout control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled. Computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the game machine frame open sensor detects that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No. 4. For payout control, because the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command). Even if the microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, it does not turn on the EXS signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the ON state of the lock switch 21TM051. And, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting value is controlled to the setting change mode that can be changed. During the period controlled to the setting change mode, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not execute ball lending.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine is provided.
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The granting means (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) can grant a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means.
When the game control means is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control means does not output the special signal (the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 for outputting the connection confirmation signal changes the setting. Executed after the mode ends, after the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A3
It is a game machine of means A1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and the gaming device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. It is possible to add a game medium based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. When the connection confirmation signal is not input, the PRDY signal is not turned on. 2. Connection confirmation. Do not turn on the PRDY signal when no command is received),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4
It is a game machine of means A1 and
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine is provided.
At least one of the game control means and the granting means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means (for example, an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which the game machine frame or the door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened. A game machine frame equipped with a game machine frame open sensor that can detect that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and a door frame open sensor that can detect that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the game machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, it is possible to limit the addition of the game medium.

The game machine of means A5
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The granting means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to the input of the grant request signal from the game device (the BRQ signal is turned on), and the grant preparation signal When the grant command signal output from the gaming device is input in response to the input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the gaming medium is fed.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the grant preparation signal is not output even if the grant request signal is input (the EXE signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A6
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is used when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When 21TM052 is on), control to the above setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is used when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When 21TM052 is off), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the game machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means A8
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification in response to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the game machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from a gaming device when changing a set value. The invention according to the means B1 to the means B7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a game device.

The game machine of means B1
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A predetermined control means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls a payout motor 21TM289) that executes a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode is provided.
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute predetermined control based on the signal output from the game device (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on and the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command are received while the connection confirmation signal is ON for payout control. Microcomputer 21TM370 can perform ball lending regardless of whether it is in the setting change mode or not),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device can be appropriately executed, and the control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when the setting change mode is controlled can be avoided. ..

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (power failure, etc.) while the predetermined control is being executed, and then controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting is performed. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending when the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and after the power supply is restarted When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without immediately resuming the ball lending).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the predetermined event occurs, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The game machine of means B3
It is a game machine of means B1
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is being executed and controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the execution of ball lending. When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of the subsequent power restoration, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. Ball lending will not resume even after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is in the case where the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. In the case), control to the above setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is in the case where the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state. In the case), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started.

The game machine of means B5
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game information is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the set value (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029), it notifies that the game state has been initialized (display). Display the letter "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means B6
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification in response to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the game machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately perform control when the gaming medium passes through a specific area. The invention according to the means C1 to the means C6 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that appropriately executes control when the game medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of means C1
Specific control (special) according to the set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different) based on the game medium passing through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing big hit determination processing in symbol process processing, and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode is provided.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The game machine of means C2
It is a game machine of means C1
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is in the case where the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. In the case), control to the above setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is in the case where the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state. In the case), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means C4
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C3.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification in response to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The game machine of means C6
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the game machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means D1 to the means D5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that executes an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of means D1
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value so that it can be confirmed.
A set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the set value) for storing the set value is provided.
In the setting change mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (clear switch (clear switch (clear switch)). Control to the setting change mode based on the setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state),
In the setting confirmation mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear) when the power supply to the game machine is started. Based on the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
The set value is determined based on the specific operation in the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state).
The set value storage means stores the set value before being controlled by the setting change mode when controlled by the setting change mode (stores in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and then. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (controlled to the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while the setting change mode is controlled.

The game machine of means D2 is
It is a game machine of means D1 and
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 to the ON state) when the power supply to the game machine is started. When the operation) is performed, it is controlled to the above setting change mode, and
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed and the initialization operation is not performed when the power supply to the game machine is started.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means D3
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is blinked and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has been completed.

The game machine of means D4
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D3.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine. Computer 100) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes the control of the effect.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes notification according to the command (displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Setting confirmation" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means D5
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D4.
Timing after the power supply to the game machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 was operated was received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch was detected" and "the operation of the setting changeover switch was detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions according to the means E1 to the means E8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The game machine of means E1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for big hit judgment).
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) from the 1st terminal (10th terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal prize, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the game machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) from the second terminal (7th terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The game machine of means E2 is
It is a game machine of means E1
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the game machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed).
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) that can control the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting is changed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to grasp that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3
It is a game machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal). The security signal is continuously output for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is made by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that it may be controlled to the change mode.

The game machine of means E4
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E5
Means E4 game machine
The setting confirmation mode can be controlled when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Controlled to setting confirmation mode based on),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation is performed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to grasp that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6
It is a game machine of means E1
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) that can control the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting change mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E7
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E8
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E7.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051).
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the effect control CPU 120). When the lock switch operation command indicating that the game control and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 were operated, the setting changeover switch operation command was received from the game control microcomputer 100, "The operation of the lock switch was detected. , "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp information related to the set value, but JP-A-2014-200506 Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 0102 is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The invention according to the means F1 to the means F11 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The game machine of means F1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for big hit judgment).
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (transition to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the set value of the game machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F2 is
It is a game machine of means F1
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
When the setting change mode ends, the special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting change mode ends, a number of pulses corresponding to the fixed set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the game machine from a common terminal.

The game machine of means F3
Means F2 game machine
When controlled to the setting change mode, a non-special mode special signal (a setting change corresponding signal that is ON during the period controlled by the setting change mode) is output, and when the setting change mode ends, After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after turning off the setting change corresponding signal once when the setting change mode ends), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped settings corresponding to the fixed set value) is set. Output the change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the game machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the setting confirmation mode ends, a special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting confirmation mode ends, a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the game machine from a common terminal.

The game machine of means F5
Means F4 game machine
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, a special signal of a non-special mode (a signal corresponding to a setting change that is ON during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode) is output, and when the setting confirmation mode ends. After stopping the output of the special signal once (after turning off the setting change corresponding signal once when the setting confirmation mode ends), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed setting value) Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the game machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F6
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F5.
In the special signal of the special aspect, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of times of output of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the set value can be easily specified in the external device.

The game machine of means F7
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F6.
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal prize, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the game machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8
Means F7 game machine
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from the tenth terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside by a simple configuration.

The game machine of means F9 is
Means F7 game machine
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means F10
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F9.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052).
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, a special signal of the special mode is output upon termination of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, it is output. Regardless of whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as the setting change corresponding signal). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of means F11
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F10.
A special signal of the special aspect is output with the end of the process related to the change of the set value (a pulse shape of a number corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting change mode). Outputs the setting change corresponding signal of, and outputs the pulsed setting change corresponding signal of the number corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the setting confirmation mode ends), and the special signal After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) by a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the jackpot game state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. Outputs the number of pulsed setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the set value to the outside at a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the chance that the set value can be specified in the external device.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately control the addition of the gaming medium when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means G1 to the means G10 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that appropriately executes control regarding the addition of a game medium.

The game machine of means G1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a granting means (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of imparting game value (pachinko ball) (pachinko gaming machine 21TM370 for controlling payout motor 21TM289).
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the game machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the game machine (for example, the game machine frame 3) is opened. A game provided with means (a game machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state). It is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300.
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the addition of the game value is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 to execute the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game value.

The game machine of means G2 is
Means G1 game machine
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is a game machine capable of detecting that the open state detection means (game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The open state is provided by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided with the frame open sensor and the door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state. When (a state in which the game machine frame 3 is open) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processes after step S21TM3530 are executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled in a state where the open state of the game machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The game machine of means G3
A game machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) that stores specific information (value of the setting changing flag) that can be specified to be controlled in the setting change mode.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
The setting change mode control means can be put into a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the game machine is restarted (game). In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting changing flag is set after the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , If the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode and shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the normal game processing is not performed and the power is turned off.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the game can be stopped.

The game machine of means G4
Means G3 game machine
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting changing flag) is erased (based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), YES is determined in step S21TM3530, and the setting change mode is set. Finished, and the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode is finished.

The game machine of means G5
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to G4.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game is provided.
The granting means (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to execute the granting of the game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game medium is not paid out. When neither the opening of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game medium is paid out),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to execute the giving of the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means G6 is
Means G5 game machine
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) is
Based on the reception of information (number of payouts) regarding the addition of the game value from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the game control timer interrupt processing), the game value is added.
It has a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The storage means can store the given information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
After the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the granting means adds the game value according to the grant information stored in the storage means (the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium). If it occurs, the payout of the game media is interrupted, the payout that was interrupted after the power is turned on is restarted, and the unpaid number of game media is paid out),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the given information regarding the game value to be given after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and it is stored after the power supply to the game machine is restarted. Since it is possible to add the game value corresponding to the given information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

The game machine of means G7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G6.
It can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) executes the giving of the game value based on the signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the game device.
When the open state is detected, the addition of the game value based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (the game machine frame door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the game machine. When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not done),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the granting of the game value while the game machine frame or the door frame is open is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem due to the granting operation while the game machine frame or the door frame is open. It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work while the game machine frame or door frame is open.

The game machine of means G8
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G7.
A game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing the setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized.
The game state of the game machine is not initialized due to the control to the setting confirmation mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, and in step S21TM3040. If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. When the setting confirmation mode is executed. The step S21TM3150 is determined so that the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050 by determining NO in step S21TM3040 based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, or NO is determined in step S21TM3140. Does not migrate to),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether or not to initialize the game state.

The game machine of means G9 is
Means G8 game machine
It is provided with a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (data of the unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The given information is initialized as the game state of the game machine is initialized (the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. Along with this, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed, so that the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not paid out. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the game state of the game machine is initialized including the information to be given regarding the game value to be given, so that the management in the game store can be facilitated.

The game machine of means G10
Means G8 game machine
It is provided with a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (data of the unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The given information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the game state of the game machine is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. However, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed. Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even if the game state of the game machine is initialized, the given information is not initialized, so that the information regarding the game value to be given can be appropriately protected.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value are determined on the external device side. Although it may be necessary to distinguish and recognize both, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both can be recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize them. The inventions according to the means H1 to H5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the game machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value are divided on the external device side. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be recognized separately.

The game machine of means H1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
The setting value can be changed,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that occurs in the game machine, and processing related to the change of the set value (setting change). It is possible to output a specific signal according to the mode),
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event and the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value are different (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode by executing RAM clear). If, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The game machine of means H2 is
Means H1 game machine
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when it is controlled to the setting change mode). It is output for a period in which 30 seconds are added to the specified period, and when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period in which 50 ms is added to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of means H1 or means H2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, "lock switch" The warning "The operation of the setting selector switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible for a clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means H4
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H3.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the processing related to the setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of means H5
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H4.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the processing related to the setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the game machine to the outside.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions according to the means I1 to I6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of processing related to the set value on the external device side. ..

The game machine of means I1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
The setting value can be changed,
The output of a specific signal (security signal) is started in response to the start of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value.
The output of a specific signal (security signal) is stopped in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the game machine.

The game machine of means I2
It is a game machine of means I1
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that occurs in the game machine.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event and the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value are different (RAM clear is executed for the security signal). If it is not controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The game machine of means I3
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when it is controlled to the setting change mode). It is output for a period in which 30 seconds are added to the specified period, and when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period in which 50 ms is added to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means I4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I3.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, "lock switch" The warning "The operation of the setting selector switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible for a clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means I5
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I4.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the control related to the set value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of means I6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I5.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the control related to the set value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the game machine to the outside.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a game machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means K1 to the means K7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means K1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
The rate at which the mode of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the mode of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 13-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003. The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than that of the first hold display 30TM001).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information as the information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving the interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. At the same time, it is possible to be interested in the aspects of the first information and the second information.

The game machine of means K2 is
Means K1 game machine
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the mode after the change is different between the first information and the second information, each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means K3
A game machine of means K1 or means K2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The jackpot expectation is higher when is in the red form)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The game machine of means K4
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 13-9 (FIG. 13-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode having the same display color Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105), and the second information corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 13-9 (FIG. 13-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star-shaped display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red) in the red mode, which has the same display color, is displayed. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved and the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be interested.

The game machine of means K5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K4.
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The game machine of means K6
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the first action effect and the second action effect is different, so that the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state which is advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 13-3, active). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which mode of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a game machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to the means L7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means L1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
When the mode of the first information changes, at least a part of the advance notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 13-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is When changed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a game machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information such as first information and second information as information corresponding to a common variable display, the complexity of the production is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The game machine of means L2
It is a game machine of means L1
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the mode after the change is different between the first information and the second information, each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means L3
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The jackpot expectation is higher when is in the red form)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The game machine of means L4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 13-9 (FIG. 13-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode having the same display color Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105), and the second information corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 13-9 (FIG. 13-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star-shaped display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red) in the red mode, which has the same display color, is displayed. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved and the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be interested.

The game machine of means L5
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L4.
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The game machine of means L6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the first action effect and the second action effect is different, so that the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means L7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state which is advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 13-3, active). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which mode of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which the active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display and the display mode of the active display is changed each time the pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In a game machine as described in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means M1 to M6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means M1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
A change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes is provided.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as the change suggestion effect of the success mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-16, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The game machine of means M2 is
Means M1 gaming machine
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the final display of the active display). Expectations for big hits differ depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous. The higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the expectation of a big hit.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The game machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2.
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 13-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The game machine of means M4
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M3.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
It is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect after executing one type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (1). , As shown in FIG. 13-18 (4), the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M5
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M4.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, and a change suggestion effect in which character C appears. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-17, the rate is higher than that of the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of means M6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M5.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 13-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D). High percentage)
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which the active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display and the display mode of the active display is changed each time the pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In a game machine as described in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means N1 to N6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means N1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
A change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes is provided.
In the change suggestion effect execution means, as the change suggestion effect, the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 13-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the display mode) and the effect of suggesting a change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character D is repelled by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. It is possible to perform a production that does not let you
A predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state, a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-ream symbol in which re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after a temporary stop) is provisionally In the period until the stop, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period from the start of the fluctuation to the time when any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right stops first) Correspondingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode] with respect to the [number of executions of the change suggestion effect]. The higher the ratio of, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For example, when [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] is 2/3, the display mode is blue. And when it is 4/5, the display mode is a red mode with a higher expectation of a big hit.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The game machine of means N2
Means N1 game machine
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) differs depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003) (as shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the jackpot expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous. The higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the expectation of a big hit.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The game machine of means N3
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2,
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 13-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The game machine of means N4
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N3.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
It is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect after executing one type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (1). , As shown in FIG. 13-18 (4), the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means N5
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N4.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, and a change suggestion effect in which character C appears. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-17, the rate is higher than that of the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of means N6
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N5.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 13-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D). High percentage)
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for the external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500206 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of a control state related to the setting.

The game machine of means O1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) for a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). When the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses, and when the setting change mode ends, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
It is a game machine of means O1
It is provided with an initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150).
The initialization means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting is changed. When the mode is controlled, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). In step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102, which stores the setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). It is characterized in that it is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the game machine without performing a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100), which clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute an error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The game machine of means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied) capable of executing error notification. ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
It is a game machine of means P1
In the setting change mode control means, the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification (at the time of power-on, all steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the setting value is appropriately set while avoiding unnecessary error notification. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of means P3
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
Having the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (Case), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The game machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is
It is a game machine of means Q1
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. Controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the game machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
When the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode and the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the set value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

Further, as a game machine of means QA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2010-2010902.
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is automatically controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied),
further,
At least the first numerical value display area (for example, the interface area 18SG005I including the normal timer and the remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and the second numerical value display area (for example, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer) and A display means (for example, an image display device 5) having a modified example 156SG-1 with a display area for the number of remaining games in the additional zone, and
A predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect, a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modified example 156SG-1) in which a numerical value is updated to a specific value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area. A portion in which the number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone) and a special effect (for example, FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect are shown. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, the portion that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) and CPU120 for production control) and
With
As the special effect, the effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect for the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the period of the normal timer effect, the period of the special timer effect, the period of the normal timer effect, and the period of the special timer effect. As shown in the part where the total value is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B and the modification 156-1, the number of additional games is the number of remaining games of ART and the additional zone. The part to be added to both the number of remaining games) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state. Further, since the special effect is executed at an appropriate timing when a predetermined period corresponding to the specific effect elapses, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, the execution frequency of the predetermined effect may be associated with the set value of the game machine. For example, the higher the setting value of the game machine, the higher the execution frequency of the predetermined effect may be. By doing so, the set value can be estimated based on the predetermined effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, the execution frequency of the special effect may be associated with the set value of the game machine. For example, the higher the setting value of the game machine, the higher the execution frequency of the special effect may be. By doing so, the set value can be estimated based on the special effect, and the interest is improved.

In addition, the set value may be suggested according to the mode of the special effect that suggests the predetermined effect. For example, in the timer effect as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-24, a plurality of types of time display sizes and colors are prepared, and the time display is such that the set value is advantageous to the player. The ratio of the increase in the size of is increased. Alternatively, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more flashy the color of the time display becomes (for example, black or blue for an unfavorable setting value, red or rainbow color for an advantageous setting value). ) The ratio may be increased. In this way, the setting value is suggested according to the mode of the special effect, and the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machines of means Q2 to Q5 that can be applied to the gaming machine of means Q1 described above can also be applied to the gaming machines of means QA described above.

Further, the game machine of the means QA initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150). A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. Explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which illustrates the production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for effect control. It is a figure which shows a part of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the determination ratio of a normal timer effect and a special timer effect, and each timer effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the reach notification mode in a normal timer effect, and the effect result determination rate of a button operation effect during a special timer effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode determination ratio of the cut-in effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of each timer effect execution suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal timer effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special timer effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the button operation effect execution processing. It is a flowchart when only a normal timer effect is executed. It is a flowchart when only the special timer effect is executed, and the flowchart when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control board to the payout control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command sent and received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line which is used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a CPU for payout control executes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which the CPU for payout control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for explaining the communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example that the ball lending is not restricted in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which restarts the payout after the setting change mode ends. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of forcibly terminating the payout with the transition to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of a normal operation. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission / reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is a figure which shows the warning screen when the setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the set value and the output mode of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output mode and output period of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) a diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. .. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of limiting the ball lending based on the open state detection of the frame for a game machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming ball lending after the opening state detection of the game machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming ball lending without shifting to a setting change mode after a power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating ball lending. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode and restarting the ball lending after a power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of limiting the prize ball payout based on the open state detection of the game machine frame. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming the prize ball payout after the opening state detection of a game machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting the prize ball payout without shifting to a setting change mode after a power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating the prize ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and restarting the prize ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold display and active display. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect determination process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and the gaming state after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively aroused and the effect of production is improved. In addition, the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "Super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the Super Reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display location may be different.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expected degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expected degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expected degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. The title display end timing may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. , The way to display the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of Super Reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 8-4 As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but first five white stars are displayed, and the stage It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and 8-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5, black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but the black stars are two. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

8-5 (G) to 8-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effect) may be made different in the effect mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's preference and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK030 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and improves the degree of expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine the changing timing. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). ), The reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, although the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of feasible production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The ratio of the dialogue notice and which production mode changes (the ratio of acting on which) may be different, or the ratio of changing to what color (how many stages) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any one of the title and the dialogue is obtained according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content in the character movement and the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified, as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 31AK-1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the outcome of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation in the modified example 31AK-1 in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is in the center portion as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability when it is done is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach effect shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification example 31AK-2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen and the character is displayed in the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the speaker 8 executes a notification to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 executes a notification to emit light. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of Feature 122SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. The front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is omitted because it is the same as the feature portion 31AK described above. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 122SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, the lock switch 122SG051 for switching to a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed. The setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state, and the opening sensor 122SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back left portion of the board case 122SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 122SG201.

Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the frame 3 for the gaming machine. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) by using a setting key. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the command 8001H is the first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the determination result (pre-determination result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ), And different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value changing operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying wp that the operation for confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changed state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the feature unit 122SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 9-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns of super reach α and super reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value of 3 is set as the fluctuation pattern that causes non-reach loss when executed twice, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain a fluctuation pattern that causes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -6 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), and the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal figure display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown). ) Etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 3 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 3 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2 and 1, the more advantageous the value for the game field side.

9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), the normal state or the time reduction state (low). More judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" than in the case of "certain state". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability is determined (in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/150 when the set value is 2, and 1/99 when the set value is 3). In comparison, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher (in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the set value is 1/150, and the set value is 2 is 1/99, and 3 is 1/50). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that

Further, in each display result judgment table, the judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Then, the probability of being determined is set to 1/200. It should be noted that the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit gaming state or small hit. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is low, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit game state or small hit game Judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined when the state is controlled is high (big hit probability and small hit probability: set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), a mode in which the winning probability of the small hit is different is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). May be.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually judged whether or not the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit. May be good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), each display result determination table is assigned a determination value for a small hit, which is shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1) does not have to be assigned a determination value to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, in FIG. 9-7 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9-8. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot type may be determined to be jackpot B. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is determined. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. ..

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the game playability itself does not change is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in the case of changing the game playability according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 800 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than that and lowers in the order of set values 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of set values 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 0 regardless of whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Of the 997s, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1, 2, and 3.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total of 2 to 4 stored storage numbers. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the MR3 determination value ranges from 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

In this way, when the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher. , The set values 3, 2, and 1 are lowered in this order. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common determination ratio" in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is different from the setting values in which the determination ratios are completely the same with different set values (feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment). (For example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the set value 1 to the set value 3) in which the determination ratio is the same.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which is the same regardless of the set value set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is lost, a mode in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The fluctuation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), changes are made using a change pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the number of reserved storages of the special symbol and the number of pending storages of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss does not matter which of the values 1 to 3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (detection order of game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number of stored data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map hold storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, the necessary initial settings are performed (122SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. Further, when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). .. In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped by the parity bit or the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start wait timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is set to -1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa008). If the effect control board activation start wait timer is not timered out (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again and the effect control board 12 waits for a period until it is activated. Further, when the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out of the timer (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), the setting value confirmation process for displaying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed on the display monitor 122SG029, and the clerk of the game hall or the like displays it. By visually recognizing the monitor 122SG029, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after the set value confirmation process is executed. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is started without being operated, the set value is confirmed if the game machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is impossible.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a restoration process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board to wait during the period until the effect control board 12 starts. Then, the value of the effect control board start-up wait timer is set to -1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start-up wait timer has timed out (122SGSa016). When the effect control board activation start wait timer is not timer-out (122SGsa016; N), 122SGsa015 is executed again and the effect control board 12 waits for a period until it is activated. Further, when the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 sends a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, and proceeds to the 122SGsa021 (12SGsa021). 122SGSa019).

Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the setting change process for changing the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa020). Is executed, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, the set value cannot be changed unless the game machine frame 3 is opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. ing.

When the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in 122SGSa019a, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (122SGSa022) so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process executed by the CPU 103. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the 122SGSa033 to wait until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and issues a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. It is transmitted and the set value confirmation process is completed (122SGSa035).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, by ending the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation process), the state becomes the same as when starting with a normal hot start, so that the process of 122SGSa035 is performed. The command to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 9-13 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). When the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 and proceeds to the 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not saved in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the first address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) "00H" at the specified address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is automatically set to a set value by setting "00H" to the address F000. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), and if the specified address is the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046). Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Furthermore, at other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), in addition to clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, special figure hold memory and normal figure hold Game information including storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be prompted to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is an address (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) in which the set value is stored when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data. ) Clears data other than the set value by storing "00H", but if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or there is no backup data, "00H" is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all data including the set value by storing.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the head address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. May be good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 in this way, immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 as the address for clearing the data when executing the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 9-13 (A). The address of is specified, and "00H" may be sequentially stored from the address F000 to the address immediately before the address.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the data excluding the set value of the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, but the present invention is limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. It may be.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information can be used for game control. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register). May be omitted so that the processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the clear switch backup information is stored in the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the processing from being overwritten by other information (data).

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the set value change process is started (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGsa018). Then, the set value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054). When there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 122SG052 (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGsa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGsa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 122SGsa054 to 122SGsa056. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 (temporary set value displayed in the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, so that the set value stored in the address F001 is set as the present set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko game machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command according to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the setting value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the game control main process (immediately after the setting change process is completed).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, by turning off the lock switch 122SG051, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is illustrated in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening, the operation of the clear switch, the pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051 and the like are illustrated. By turning off the lock switch 122SG051 after executing the operation of, a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, or when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a setting value change start is given to the effect control board 12. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is a cold start notification to the effect control board 12. It may be executed after sending the command or the setting value change start notification command.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is executed again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). (Clear the data of). By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems such as the game being started while the invalid data is stored in the RAM.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started after executing a common RAM clear process (122SGSa017) between the case of starting with a cold start and the case of starting with a setting change state. An example is an example in which a command corresponding to a state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, or setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, but the present invention is limited to this. The command according to the activated state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting value change) depends on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start or in the setting change state. A common RAM clearing process may be executed after the end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes the switch process (S21) to the command control process (S27). .. As shown in FIGS. 9-16, in the power supply cutoff detection process, the CPU 103 first receives an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no power off signal input (122SGSa051; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (122SGSa051; Y), the backup data including the set value stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Next, the effect control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer goes out of the timer (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer goes out of the timer.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of superreach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared) and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When the hot start notification command is not received (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). (Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (122SGS408), the information stored in the RAM 102 was cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 were cleared. The RAM clear notification process for performing the notification (execution of the RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to notify the clerk of the game hall or the like that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the notification that the setting value is being changed (notification during setting value change). ) Is being changed while the setting value is being changed (122SGS411). In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, generally, the game machine frame 122SG003 is open, and the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value is the main board 11. The display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the machine is being visually recognized. That is, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value, so that the clerk of the game hall displays the image. From the display of the device 5, it is considered that it is not possible to determine whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as a notification during the setting value change, the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state to the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You just need to notify that you are.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command are received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value is completed (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value specification command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) from the received setting value specification command is received. (Value) is specified, and the specified set value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as set value information (values of "1" to "3" according to the set value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the set value change end notification command and the set value specification command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

The feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after executing the setting value changing notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value changing notification is used. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the setting value changing notification, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value changing notification, or the RAM is cleared after the setting value changing notification is completed. Notification may be executed.

Further, when the setting value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). When the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), the setting value confirmation notification process for notifying that the setting confirmation state (the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is performed. Execute (122SGS415). In the setting value confirmation notification process, the clerk of the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the image on the image display device 5, emitting the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. It suffices if it is possible to notify the surroundings of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the setting is confirmed. If the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the setting value confirmation end notification command (122SGS410; N), it proceeds to the processing of 122SGS405, and proceeds to the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change start notification command, and the setting. It waits until any command of the value confirmation start notification command is received (the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, 122SGS414 is repeatedly executed).

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start state or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since the input of the player information is received from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, etc. The RAM 122 does not clear the (number of times of super reach, etc.) and the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "3" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.). Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is the set value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to overwrite (update memory).

That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the production information are cleared, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state. Although the form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared is illustrated in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game is played. The person information and the production information may be cleared.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays an image. The device 5 starts displaying the initial symbol corresponding to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. When set, the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set or a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (122SGS421). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the start notification process is executed in the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko game machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the activation notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different depending on the presence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the output sound A is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect. The lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds, the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound C for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). To execute. Although the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. It refers to the output of C and the display of the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5.

As described above, since the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing of the image display device 5 are the same, these pachinko games Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start), and the cold start notification command. Is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed). The period is 40 seconds.

The feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer of a game hall or a management device such as a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. A signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as an activation notification at the time of the activation.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, some devices that execute the start notification are common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the activation notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the game machine frame 122SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko game machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output from only some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which it is executed regardless of receiving any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command. The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, set value confirmation end notification command, and set value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, activation notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the player is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (122SGS422). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (122SGS431). If there is no power off signal input (122SGS431; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (122SGS431; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The backup data to be included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 9-3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for production (122SGS425) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for production such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (122SGS426) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (122SGS427) for outputting the person information and the effect information aggregation process (122SGS428) for aggregating the effect information are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server to play the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. To do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any one of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is decremented by -1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (122SGS442) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7) is executed. By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variation display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby displaying the fluctuation four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the cold start or in the setting change state, the game is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game is possible. As a setting, a mode of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Based on the fact that the game is possible regardless of whether it is started in the changed state, the settings related to the progress of the game depend on the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect may be set to the factory default state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 is the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the reach production and the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D as the second suggestion production, and when executing the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D, the Super Reach C Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach production of the super reach D, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production can be executed, and the production effect. Can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 122SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-42880 and those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). (When), a command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the game machine based on the memory that the main board (game control board) is backed up. And, regardless of the memory that the main board is backed up, the command output from the main board to the effect control board in order to clear the backed up memory, and the state in which the setting value of the game machine can be changed. If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, the effect control board is appropriate according to the activation state when the game machine is turned on and started. There was a problem that various processes could not be executed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 122SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. Part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the RAM clear shown in FIG. 9-17) capable of controlling the effect based on the control information output from the game control means (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3). Notification processing, setting value changing notification processing, setting value confirmation notification processing, etc.) and
With
The first activation of the game control means recovers based on the stored contents stored in the backup storage means as an activation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is possible to set a state (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) in which the stored contents are erased and restored regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and a setting by the setting means. It becomes one of the third activation states (for example, the setting change state), and different control information corresponding to the activation state is output to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the CPU 103 sends a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the CPU 103 is the effect control board. When a cold start notification command is sent to 12 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the effect control means can execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 122SG,
A storage means for effect control (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means is provided.
Of the information stored in the effect control storage means, the information to be erased differs depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state ( For example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasing according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) that specifies the end of the third activation state.
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activated state based on the output of the control information designating the end of the third activated state (for example, shown in FIG. 9-20). As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds in the activation notification process. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activated state or the second activated state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, is hot). Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the set value cannot be set in the activated state by the specific control.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different controls depending on the activation state to which the control information corresponds (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 receives the hot start notification command. In the start notification process, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the reception of the cold start notification command. For effect control based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the activation notification process and the reception of the setting value change end notification command. A portion in which the CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, outputs an output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and executes a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the activation notification process. As shown in -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command and cold start notification command, the decorative design is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as the initial design, and the set value. A part that displays a decorative symbol as an initial symbol in a combination of "4", "5", and "6" based on the reception of the change end notification command)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activated state is in the activated state.

Furthermore, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activated state, the game control means erases the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for specific information (for example, variant 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 excluding the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute an appropriate erasure of backup information in response to a change in a set value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of the invention 122SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game is provided.
The timing for erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activated state and the second activated state (for example, as shown in the modified example 122SG-4, pachinko When starting the game machine 1 with a cold start, the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed. , The part that executes the RAM clear process at the timing after the set value change start notification command is sent to the effect control board 12)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute the erasure of game information at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 123SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-42880 and those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). When), the main board clears the backed up memory regardless of the backed up memory (general startup state), and the game machine setting value can be changed (setting startup state). If the notification modes are the same, it is not possible to specify whether the game machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and there is a problem that it is difficult to detect an illegal setting change of the game machine. It was. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 123SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. Part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
A start notification means capable of notifying the start state of the game control means when power supply to the game machine is started (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start notification process shown in FIG. 9-17).
With
The game control means is based on a general activation state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start) in which the backup storage means is cleared and activated as the activation state, and the setting means. It has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) that enables the setting,
The activation notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start as shown in FIG. 9-20). , The light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the light emission of the game effect lamp, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image The part that executes the display of the message image on the display device 5)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily identify whether the startup state is the general startup state or the setting startup state, so that fraud due to the setting can be easily detected. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means can execute various notifications according to the priority.
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-5, during execution of the notification during change of the setting value having a high priority, The part that prevents RAM clear notification with low priority from being executed)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, since the notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent the fraud due to the setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means notifies the set activation state and the general activation state in different notification periods (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the notification period is 60 seconds, and the pachinko game machine 1 A game machine is described in which the notification period is 40 seconds when the machine is started in the setting change state), and according to this feature, appropriate notification can be executed in the period according to the startup state. ..

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means is
It has a first notification means (for example, an image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 and speakers 8L, 8R) different from the first notification means.
The set activation state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion for displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20).
The general activation state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, a portion that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R). A game machine to be used is described, and according to this feature, since the start notification is executed by different notification means, it is possible to easily recognize which start state is in which.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 123SG,
The game control means is a game control (for example, a game control by a setting common as a setting related to the game progress between the game-enabled state after the set activated state and the game-enabled state after the general activated state. A game characterized in that the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning prize determination process after the pachinko game machine 1 is started, so that it is possible to execute (a part that regulates the execution of the pre-reading notice effect up to four variable displays). The machine is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as recognition that the setting has been changed by executing the game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 124SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351. However, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351, if the game information is unintentionally deleted due to the change of the set value, the store or the player in which the game machine is installed There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 124SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. Part to do) and
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means will be erased (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification process in the modification 122SG-1). When,
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means, the game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, the CPU 103 is a modification 122SG-1). The part that executes the RAM clear processing shown in),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off the lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and
The setting means can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, when the CPU 103 has the clear switch ON. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation, so that the setting change operation is used. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the process of 122SGSa058. ),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first setting value change. The part that executes the set value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally deleted by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 124SG,
When the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After not erasing (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that there is no operation of the setting changeover switch (122SGSa054d; N), and then the lock switch 122SG051 is further turned off. If it is determined, the set value change process is completed without executing the RAM clear process (122SGsa060) based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y). Part to do)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by erasing the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 124SG,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not deleted by the game control means when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modification 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification process).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the game information from being erased, so that the game information is unintentionally described. It is possible to further prevent it from being erased.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 124SG,
The game control means is stored in the game information storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied and a predetermined confirmation operation is performed when the power supply to the game machine is started. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y) in the game control main process, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed. Part to do),
The notification means also performs the notification even when the deletion condition is satisfied (for example, as a modification 122SG-2, as shown in FIG. 9-26, the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. part)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally deleted.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 124SG,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the effect based on the control information output from the game control means.
An effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means, and
A selection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasing in the effect control storage means, and
With
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started, and the selection means selects not to execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage Erase conditions when at least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, a part that clears only the RAM 102 as shown in the modified example 122SG-3) and power supply to the game machine is started. Is satisfied, and when it is selected by the selection means to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. At the same time, at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, a portion that clears both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 as shown in the modified example 122SG-3).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, whether or not to execute the erasure of the effect control storage means as well as the erasure in the game information storage means when the erasure condition is satisfied. Can be selected.

Although the feature portion 122SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Even included in the present invention.

For example, in the feature unit 122SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed and then the lock switch. When 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed to exemplify a mode in which a new setting value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is limited thereto. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is determined first whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, and if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, in the setting change process. The RAM clear process may be executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko game machine 1.

In this way, when the RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change processing, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (12SGSa051). 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGsa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGsa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 122SGsa054d to 122SGsa056. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the set value (temporary set value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, the set value change end notification command is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 and the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether or not the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed, the setting value change end notification command is produced and controlled. It is transmitted to the board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, they are stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the set value (the set value of the newly set pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The process is executed (122SGSa060). The RAM clear process (122SGSa060) executes the same process as the RAM clear process described with reference to FIG. 9-13, and is stored in the data (stored after the address F001) excluding the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Data) is cleared. After the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) is executed, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change processing (122SGS061).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the modified example 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), the first set value is changed, as shown in FIG. 9-24. It is determined whether or not the start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the first setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). , The set value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and by changing the set value in the image display device 5, the game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, or if the set value is not changed, the lock is used. The instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25 (A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). When the second set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

Further, when the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value is being changed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. Then, when the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value specification command is not received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the setting value specification command is received (122SGS411b; Y), the received setting value specification command is used. The set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information ("1" to "3" according to the set value. (Value of) is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, so that the pachinko game machine with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the clerk of the game hall or the like. When 1 is activated, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), in the image display device 5, the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value, and the set value is changed. If not, the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

When the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051, the pachinko game machine 1 is as shown in FIG. 9-25 (B). The decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3" without changing the set value of and without clearing the RAM 102. On the other hand, when the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the clerk of the game hall turns on the clear switch again, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C), the pachinko game machine 1 Is in the setting change state, and the image display on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like inform that the setting value is being changed.

Then, when the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new set value in the setting change state, or the clerk of the game hall or the like sets the new set value and is the same as the original set value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the clerk of the amusement park sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051 in the setting change state, the set value is as shown in FIG. 9-25 (E). The RAM 102 is cleared based on the change, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "4", "5", and "6".

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The image is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, an image is displayed by activating the pachinko game machine 1 with the clear switch turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. If the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the device 5 with a cold start to clear the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102, or if the pachinko game machine 1 is not started with a cold start, the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted. The instruction to perform the above may be displayed as the message image 122SG005M2.

By doing so, for example, when a clerk of a game hall or the like accidentally turns on the clear switch in an attempt to start the pachinko game machine 1 with a hot start, the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1 and the modified example 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or is started in the cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. Although a mode of confirming whether or not to clear the RAM 102 is performed by displaying the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message on the image display device 5. Whether or not it is confirmed may be performed only when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state or when it is started by the cold start, or both may be performed.

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The RAM 102 is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modified example 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and the set value is changed. If this is the case, whether or not to clear the RAM 122 according to the fact that the set value has been changed in the image display device 5 or the RAM 102 has been cleared, and the fact that these set values have been changed or the RAM 102 has been cleared. The message image 122SG005M3 including the options may be displayed, and the selection of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

When clearing the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 clears the information other than the set value information in the RAM 122 by executing the RAM clearing process (resulting in this). If you do not select to clear the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 will not be cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 will be cleared).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started at the same timing (cold start notification command and setting for the effect control board 12) when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the cold start state and when the setting is changed. A mode in which the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted) has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 122SG-4, for example, the pachinko game machine 1 Is executed by the cold start, the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the effect control is executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state. Timing after sending the set value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, after sending the set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, the change of the set value is completed. The timing of clearing the RAM 102 may be different depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the cold start state or in the setting change state, such as executing the RAM clear process in (later).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the cold start state or in the setting change state. Although a mode in which the RAM clear notification process is executed in order to notify the fact (execute the RAM clear notification) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is described as a modification 122SG-5. When the machine 1 is started in the setting change state and the notification that the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is being changed (the notification during the setting value change is executed), the RAM clear notification is not executed, etc. When a high-priority notification (for example, a notification during a setting value change) is being executed, a low-priority notification (for example, a RAM clear notification) may not be executed.

When the priority is set for each notification in this way, the low priority notification may be executed after the high priority notification is executed. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the period for executing the notification is prevented from becoming long. You may.

Further, although the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment does not perform any setting for the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. At that time, the operation of confirming whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-mentioned RAM clear notification, setting value changing notification, setting value confirmation notification, and various activation notifications. .. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start or cold start, the start notification is executed for 60 seconds, so that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the set values are changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is being changed during these setting values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Confirmation operation can be executed.

The confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, and the like. The setting value change start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, the setting value confirmation start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the like may be executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Further, when the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. In this case, even if an error in the confirmation operation occurs, the execution of the notification during the setting value change may be prioritized and the error notification in the confirmation operation may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting changed state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted once (pachinko gaming). The new set value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko game machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is performed. After slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, a confirmation operation that can be performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is restarted, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, a confirmation that requires a relatively long period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The action may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required for the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this and is cleared from the RAM 102. The specific information that is not provided may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a set value as specific information that is not cleared, a temporary set value as information to be cleared, a game information, and the like are stored in the RAM 102 has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information that cannot be cleared such as a set value, and the other RAM stores a temporary set value and a game. Cleared information such as information may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary setting value, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored according to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. It is possible to make a difference whether or not to clear the RAM). Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

Further, when two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Randam Access Memory) to which a backup battery is connected is connected to a RAM for storing specific information that is not cleared such as a set value. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Randam Access Memory) as the RAM in which temporary setting values and game information are stored, it is possible to reliably clear data that is more important than other data such as setting values. It may be possible to memorize it without having to.

Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is the main board 11. It may be mounted on. By doing so, it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board is not limited thereto. A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided in the vicinity of the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in No. 11 to facilitate the operation of changing the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment, an embodiment in which a display monitor 122SG029 for displaying a set value is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game When the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the like can be calculated in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main board 11 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment illustrates a mode in which the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Since the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the set value 1 is set as the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the set value 3 is set as the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the game field). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set, and the set value 3 may be set as the most advantageous set value for the player.

In particular, in the feature unit 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players cause the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. 9-13 (A)) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to illegally set the set value 1. It is expected to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 as the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 plays the game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is possible to prevent a person from being in an advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 include the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although a mode in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (controls related to notification at startup are different) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these special controls and specific controls In addition to the control related to the notification at the time of activation described above, the initial symbol (see FIG. 9-19), the background image, and the character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. Whether or not to perform control related to the production such as different things (the production mode and the production state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes capable of playing) and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 are executed. It may include control related to the confirmation operation such that the mode of the confirmation operation and the execution period are different. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be controls in which at least a part of the object controlled by the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. ..

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine. For example, a game is created by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. Is possible to start, and one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display derived to the image display device is completed. It can also be applied to slot machines where prizes can be generated according to the result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 has received the setting value change start notification command. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting change has been executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these notifications are transmitted by the main board 11 (CPU103). In this case, a signal that can identify that the main board 11 is changing the setting to an external management device such as a hall management computer, for example, information. It is possible to notify an external device by outputting from the terminal board, and further, the main board 11 (CPU103) displays and lights the display, the lamp, etc. connected to the main board 11. By controlling the state, it may be recognizable from the outside that the setting is being changed. For example, all the indicators, lamps, and the like connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between the state where the setting is being changed and the state other than that (the state where the game is possible), it is preferable to make the display, the lamp, etc. connected to the main board 11 emit light in a mode different from that during the normal game. ..

Further, not only when these settings are being changed, but also when the settings are being confirmed, the main board 11 (CPU103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify the user, or is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and lighting state of the display, lamp, etc., it may be possible to notify from the outside that the setting is being confirmed so that it can be recognized.

By executing the notification by the main board 11 (CPU103) in this way, for example, even for a model that does not have the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed and the setting is confirmed. You can recognize that it is inside.

When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed may be provided. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display connected to the main board 11 (CPU103) for the purpose of preventing an increase in cost due to the provision of these dedicated lamps and LEDs. The display mode of the device 20 is a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (variable display, non-variable display (standby), big hit game, etc.), for example, a blinking display or a special display pattern (special special feature). It may be notified by lighting and displaying in (Fig.).

Further, in the case of providing a dedicated lamp or LED, for example, in order to prevent the player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, for example, these lamps or the like. An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the ordinary symbol display 20.

In addition, when notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being confirmed, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in the notification mode (same output signal) of 1. Alternatively, by notifying (notifying the outside) each of these states in an individual notification mode (different output signal), it may be possible to identify which state of each state is from the outside.

Further, when it is possible to notify that the main board 11 (CPU 103) is changing the setting or confirming the setting by lighting / blinking a dedicated lamp or LED, the display control unit on the effect control board 12 Without waiting for the rise of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as "setting change" on the image display device 5 to start), the setting is being changed immediately by lighting / blinking the dedicated lamp or LED. It is possible to notify that there is something or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Explanation of Feature Unit 148SG in the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 148SG is a gaming machine in which the effect that can be executed during the variable display can be changed by the operation of the player. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, the interface region 148SG005I is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment. The lower left of the interface area 148SG005I is a first hold storage display area in which the hold display can be displayed so that the number of hold storages (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game of the first special symbol can be specified. The lower right corner of the interface area 148SG005I is capable of displaying the hold display so that the number of hold storages (special figure hold memory) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game of the second special symbol can be specified. It is set in the second hold storage display area. Further, the upper part of the interface area 148SG005I is set in the normal timer effect execution area where the normal timer effect described later can be executed.

The control command transmitted from the relay board 15 to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. These effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp. 9 and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED are included.

FIG. 10-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the determination result (pre-determination result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variation display result designation command for notifying the pre-determination result that the variation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variation A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variation display result designation command for notifying the pre-determination result that the variation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variation B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variation" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the first hold storage display area or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner in the second hold storage display area or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination and the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR4 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR4 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10-2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR4 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 10-3 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 148SG. In the feature unit 148SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode corresponds to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and the case where the variable display mode is "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although the feature unit 148SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 148SG is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. ing. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this feature unit 148SG, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 148SG, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit. That is, in the present feature unit 148SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the super reach effect of the super reach α or the super reach β is executed at a higher rate than the normal reach effect.

In addition, in this feature unit 148SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 148SG uses a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table.

In the display result determination table of the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state) , A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "miss", and "small hit".

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is the result of determining whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. , It is the judgment data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the small big hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figure display results of "big hit". Is assigned to. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment). About 1/30 in the feature part 148SG of the form). That is, in the display result determination table, there is a probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability variation state (high probability state), it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values are assigned to "small hits" regardless of the game state. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" is the same regardless of the gaming state (in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the probability is about the same. It is 1/200).

FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the feature unit 148SG sets any of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot B". It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as ".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 148SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5 (B). In the feature unit 148SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Probability change jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and non-probability change jackpot B that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and shift to the low accuracy high base state are set. There is.

In the big hit game state by "probability change big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit", as described above, 16 rounds (so-called) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are performed. 16 rounds), a big hit that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). It's a big hit. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment), or the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the special figure game of the number of times is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" are used depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot type is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" and the short-term open jackpot state with a small number of rounds is controlled. Therefore, for example, by the high-opening control accompanying the time saving control. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which a small number of winning balls are obtained, and the game interest is reduced. It can be prevented.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since they are the same regardless of whether they are present, the probability of becoming a non-probable big hit and the probability of becoming a probable big hit are the same regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with many rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". You may. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the game state, that is, the data corresponding to the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 148SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Has been done. The game control data holding area 148SG150 shown in FIG. 10-6 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 148SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 148SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 148SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 148SG152. The game control timer setting unit 148SG153, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 148SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 148SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 148SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 148SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it passes through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 148SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 148SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 148SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 148SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 148SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 148SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 148SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 148SG190 shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 148SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 148SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 148SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 148SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194. The reception command buffer 148SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer 148SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 148SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 148SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 148SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 148SG194A shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 148SG will be described. FIG. 10-8 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the feature unit 148SG. In this effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the above-described pre-reading advance notice setting process, and then displays the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area and the second hold storage display area in the start winning command buffer 148SG194A. Executes the hold display update process to update the display according to the stored contents of. Then, any of the processes S170 to S177 is executed.

10-9 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (148SGS351). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (148SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 148SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (148SGS352). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in the 148SGS351 (148SGS351; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (148SGS353). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (148SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (148SGS353; Y), the start is started. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer 148SG194A received at the time of winning are higher by one buffer number. Shift to (148SGS354). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing the 148SGS352 or 148SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (148SGS355).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (148SGS356). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, when the received variation display result specification command is the second variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, 3 as a stop symbol. The combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) with the symbols aligned with "7" is determined. Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the third variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the fourth variation display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol).

If the received variation display result specification command is the fifth variation display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, a combination of decorative symbols having a predetermined rule (small hit) excluding the combination of the big hit as the stop symbol. Designs: For example, combinations such as "112" and "223" where the "left" and "middle" decorative symbols are the same, but only the "right" decorative symbol is different, or a series such as "123" and "456". Determine from the combination of numbers). In addition, when the received variation display result specification command is the first variation display result specification command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols different from the combination of the big hit and the small hit are not uniform as the stop symbols. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command read by the 148SGS355 is a normal reach or super reach fluctuation pattern (148SGS357). When the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command read by 148SGS355 is a non-reach or special hit (small hit) variation pattern (148SGS357; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS367 and the variation pattern specification command read by 148SGS355 is executed. When the indicated fluctuation pattern is a normal reach or super reach fluctuation pattern (148SGS357; Y), whether or not the normal timer effect is executed and whether or not the special timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display is based on the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation display result. Is determined (148SGS358).

As shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the normal timer effect is a normal timer for the timing when the decorative symbol is a combination of reach in the normal timer effect execution area set in the upper part of the interface area 148SG005I described above. Is activated (the subtraction display of the value of the normal timer is started) to notify the reach. In the normal timer, the timer is out (timer value is "0") at the timing when the decorative symbol is a combination of reach. Further, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is displayed at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

Further, the special timer effect is the execution of the cut-in effect described later by operating the special timer (starting the subtraction display of the value of the special timer) in the timer image 148SG005T displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. It is a production that notifies the timing. The special timer becomes timer out (timer value is "0") at the start timing of the cut-in effect. Further, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is displayed after 3 seconds from the timer out of the special timer.

The special timer effect in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment displays a specific message based on the operation of the push button 31B while the special timer is operating, and is controlled to the jackpot game state by the displayed message. It is also an effect of executing a button operation effect that suggests a ratio.

In the processing of the 148SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the normal timer effect is not executed and the special timer effect is not executed if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the fluctuation display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A). Is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 30%, and non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. It is decided, and the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. If the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the fluctuation display result is lost, the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a ratio of 90%, and the execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined. Is determined at a rate of 10%, non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the normal timer effect is not executed and the special timer effect is not executed if the fluctuation pattern is super reach and the fluctuation display result is a big hit. Determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 20%, and the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 40%. If the fluctuation pattern is super reach and the fluctuation display result is lost, the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a ratio of 40%, and the normal timer effect is executed and the special timer effect is not executed. Is determined at a rate of 30%, non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 10%. decide.

That is, in the feature unit 148SG in the present embodiment, focusing on the case where the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the ratio of executing the normal timer effect and being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation degree) is , The ratio is set higher than the rate of executing the normal timer effect and being controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation in the fluctuation display of the normal reach; normal timer effect execution> normal timer effect not executed).

Focusing on the case of executing the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the ratio of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect that is controlled to the maximum jackpot game state when neither timer effect is executed (big hit). Expectation) is low, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of executing only the normal timer effect, executing only the special timer effect, and executing both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. Set (Big hit expectation in variable display of super reach; execute both normal timer effect and special timer effect> execute only special timer effect> execute only normal timer effect> both normal timer effect and special timer effect Non-execution).

After the execution of the 148SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the normal timer effect is determined (148SGS359). When the execution of the normal timer effect is determined (148SGS359; Y), the reach notification mode (color of the numerical value displayed as the normal timer) in the normal timer effect is determined based on the variation display result (148SGS360).

In the processing of the 148SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 sets the color of the numerical value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode to 10% when the variation display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A). The ratio is determined to be white, the ratio is determined to be blue, the ratio is determined to be red, and the ratio is determined to be red. On the other hand, if the variable display result is lost, the color of the numerical value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode is determined to be white characters at a rate of 80%, blue characters at a rate of 15%, and 5%. Decide in red letters by percentage.

That is, regarding the normal timer effect in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the case where the normal timer is displayed in red in the normal timer effect execution area has the highest ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation). , When the normal timer is displayed in white characters in the normal timer effect execution area, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set to be the lowest (the jackpot expectation level for each reach notification mode (character color) in the normal timer effect). : Red letters> Blue letters> White letters).

After the execution of the 148SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 sets the normal timer effect waiting start timer and proceeds to the 148SGS362 (148SGS361). If it is determined in the process of 148SGS359 that the non-execution of the normal timer effect is determined (148SGS359; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS362 without executing the processes of 148SGS360 and 148SGS361.

In the 148SGS362, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the special timer effect is determined (148SGS362). When the execution of the special timer effect is decided (148SGS362; Y), the effect result of the button operation effect to be executed during the reach effect of the super reach is determined based on the variable display result (148SGS363), and the special timer effect is waiting to start. Set the timer (148SGS364).

In the processing of the 148SGS363, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variation display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 "chance" the effect result of the button operation effect at a rate of 30%. Decide on the display, decide on the "hot!" Display at a rate of 50%, and decide on the "super hot!" Display at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is lost, the effect result of the button operation effect is determined to be "chance" display at a rate of 70%, "hot!" Display at a rate of 25%, and 5%. It is decided to display "super hot!" At the rate of.

That is, in the button operation effect in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the case where the image display device 5 is displayed with "super hot!" Based on the operation of the push button 31B is the ratio controlled to the maximum hit game state. (Expectation of big hit) is high, and when "chance!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is set to be the lowest (button operation effect). Expectation of big hits for each production result: "Super hot!" Display> "Hot!" Display> "Chance!" Display).

After the execution of the 148SGS364, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect based on the variation display result (148SGS364). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the cut-in effect A in which the character A is displayed is determined at a rate of 20%, and the character B is displayed. The execution of the cut-in effect B is determined at a rate of 80%. If the variable display result is lost, the execution of the cut-in effect A is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of the cut-in effect B is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, when the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect, it is compared with the case where the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect. The ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation) is set high (big hit expectation for each character displayed as a cut-in effect; display character B> display character A).

The feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the character A or the character B can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a cut-in effect, three or more types of characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 may be provided.

If it is determined in 148SGS362 that the special timer effect is not executed (148SGS362; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS365 without executing 148SGS363 and 148SGS364.

In the 148SGS365, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined to be executed (148SGSG365). When the execution of at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined (148SGS365; Y), the timer effect execution suggestion to be executed based on the combination of the timer effects determined to be executed. The production is decided (148SGS366), and the process proceeds to 148SGS367.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-13, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second timer effect is determined. Execution suggestion The execution of the effect is determined at a rate of 20%. If only the execution of the special timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 60%. To do. Further, when the execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is 90. Determined at a rate of%.

That is, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Is set to.

As described above, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect can be executed by both the normal reach variation display and the super reach variation display, while the special timer effect is based on the normal reach variation display. Since it can be executed only in the variable display of the super reach where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high (the jackpot expectation is high), the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect means that the first timer is executed. The fluctuation display is a fluctuation display of super reach at a higher rate than when the effect execution suggestion effect is executed, that is, the jackpot game state is entered at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. It means being controlled.

The first timer effect execution suggestion effect is an image of the operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display, or the start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the elapse of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. It is an effect of notifying by displaying the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-21 (C)). The second timer effect execution suggestion effect is an image of the operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display, or the start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the elapse of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. It is an effect of notifying by displaying the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-21 (D)).

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image larger than the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A, while the color and shape are displayed. The messages and the like displayed in the image are the same (see FIGS. 10-21 (C) and 10-21 (D)), but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B may be images in which at least a part of the size, color, shape, message displayed in the image, and the like are different.

If it is determined in 148SGS365 that both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are not executed (148SGS365; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS367 without executing the process of 148SGS366.

In the 148SGS367, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the presence / absence of the cut-in effect, and the effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (148SGS368).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, in 148SGS367, a process table is selected according to the presence / absence of the variation pattern and the cut-in effect and the effect mode of the cut-in effect, that is, the variation display of the decorative pattern and the cut-in effect. Although the embodiment in which and is executed using one process table is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the decorative pattern and the cut-in effect are each used by individual process tables. You may want to do it.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS369). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the variation display of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one is performed, but the effect control CPU 120 May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (148SGS370). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (148SGS371). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variation of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (148 SGS372).

10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the values of the process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer by -1 (148SGS401, 148SGS402, 148SGS403), and determines whether or not the process timer has timered out. (148SGS404). When the process timer is out of timer (148SGS404; Y), the process data is switched (148SGS405). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (148SGS406). Further, the effect device (effect component) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next, and the process proceeds to (148SGS407) and 148SGS409.

On the other hand, in the 148SGS404, when the process timer is out of the timer (148SGS404; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer (148SGS408), and the process proceeds to 148SGS409.

In the 148SGS409, the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process (148SGS409), and determines whether or not the normal timer effect start waiting timer or the normal timer effect process timer described later is in operation (148SGS410). ). When the normal timer effect start waiting timer or the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148 SGS410; Y), the process proceeds to 148 SGS412 after executing the normal timer effect execution process (148 SGS411). If neither the normal timer effect start wait timer nor the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148 SGS410; N), the process proceeds to 148 SGS 412 without executing the process of 148 SGS 411.

In the 148SGS412, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special timer effect start waiting timer or the special timer effect process timer described later is in operation (148SGS412). When the special timer effect start waiting timer or the special timer effect process timer is operating (148 SGS412; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS414 after executing the special timer effect execution process (148SGS413). If neither the special timer effect start waiting timer nor the special timer effect process timer is operating (148 SGS412; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS414 without executing the process of 148SGS413.

In the 148SGS414, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the interface area 148SG005I is hidden, that is, whether or not it is the timing via the reach effect of the super reach (148SGS414). When it is the non-display timing of the interface area 148SG005I (148SGS414; Y), the interface area 148SGS005I is hidden in the image display device 5 (148SGS415), and the process proceeds to 148SGS416. If it is not the time to hide the interface area 148SGS005I (148SGS414; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS416 without executing the processing of 148SGS415.

In the 148SGS416, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation control timer has timered out (148SGS416). When the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (148SGS416; Y), the next display screen of the decorative symbol is created and written to VRAM (148SGS417), the fluctuation control timer is reset, and the process proceeds to 148SGS419 (148SGS418).

If the fluctuation control timer is not out of the timer (148SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 148SG419 without executing the processes of 148SGS417 and 148SGS418.

In the 148SGS419, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timered out (148SGS419). When the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out (148SGS419; N), it is further determined whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (148SGS420). When the confirmation command reception flag is set (148SGS420; Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is hidden, the interface area 148SG005I is redisplayed in the image display device 5 (148SGS421), and the effect control process flag is set. A value corresponding to the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing is set (148SGS421), and the variable display during effect processing is terminated. If the confirmation command reception flag is not set (148SGS420; N), the variable display effect processing is terminated without executing the processing of 148SGS421 and 148SGS422.

In 148SGS419, even when the fluctuation time timer is out of timer (148SGS419: Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is hidden, the interface area 148SG005I is redisplayed in the image display device 5 and the interface area 148SG005I is redisplayed (148SGS421). ), Set a value corresponding to the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing for the effect control process flag (148SGS421), and end the effect processing during variable display.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is operating (148SGS431). When the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is operating (148 SGS431; Y), the process proceeds to 148 SGS443, and when the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is not operating (148 SGS431; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is further executed. Is determined (148SGS432).

When the execution of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is not determined (148 SGS432; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is terminated, and when the execution of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined (148 SGS432; Y), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is terminated. It is determined whether or not it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B by referring to the process data being executed (148SGS433). When it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; Y), the image display device 5 starts displaying the push button operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (148SGS434). Proceed to 148SGS435. If it is not the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS435 without executing the processing of 148SGS434.

In the 148SGS435, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation of the push button 31B is being accepted (148SGS435). When the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is not in progress (148SGS435; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is terminated, and when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is in progress (148SGS435; Y), the push button 31B is further operated. It is determined whether or not the operation is detected (148SGS436).

When the operation of the push button 31B is not detected (148SGS436; N), the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether or not it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B based on the process data being executed (148SGS437). ). If it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended, and if it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS438. If the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the 148SGS436 (148SGS436; Y), the process proceeds to the 148SGS438 without executing the processing of the 148SGS437.

In the 148SGS438, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined (148SGS438). When the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined (148 SGS438; Y), the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table corresponding to the timer effect whose execution is determined is set (148 SGS439), 148 SGS441. Proceed to. When the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined (148 SGS438; N), the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table corresponding to the timer effect whose execution is determined is set (148 SGS440). Proceed to 148SGS441.

As the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A set when the execution of only the normal timer effect is determined, and the special The first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B, which is set when the execution of only the timer effect is determined, and the first timer effect, which is set when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined to be executed. 1 Timer effect execution suggestion effect process table C is stored in ROM 121 in advance.

Further, the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment includes the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A which is set when the execution of only the normal timer effect is determined. , The second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B, which is set when the execution of only the special timer effect is determined, is set when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined to be executed. The second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table C is stored in ROM 121 in advance.

Then, in the 148SGS441, the effect control CPU 120 starts the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer in the process data 1 of the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table set in the 148SGS439 or 148SGS440 (148SGS441).

In the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R The sound control execution data for controlling the process, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are associated with each process data n (1 to N) in a time series. It is arranged in order.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, speakers 8L, 8R as effect parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (148SGS442), timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process To finish.

On the other hand, in the 148SGS443, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer by -1 (148SGS443), and determines whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer has timed out (148SGS444). When the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is timer out (148SGS444; Y), it is further determined whether or not the timer out timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (Y). 148SGS445).

When the timer-out timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is not the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148 SGS445; N), the process data is switched (148 SGS446). That is, the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the set timer effect execution suggestion effect process table to the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148SGS447). ). Further, the effect device (effect component) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc., which are set next, and the process proceeds to 148SGS450.

When the timer-out timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148 SGS445; Y), the timer effect execution suggestion effect ends (148 SGS456), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. End the process.

When the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is not timer-out in 148 SGS444 (148 SGS444; N), the effect control CPU 120 is the effect device (effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer. (Parts) is controlled (148SGS449), and the process proceeds to 148SGS450.

In the 148SGS450, the effect control CPU 120 refers to whether or not the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is being notified based on the process data being executed (148SGS450). If it is not during the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect (148SGS450; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is terminated and the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is in progress. In the case (148SGS450; Y), whether or not only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined, that is, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A is set. Whether or not it is determined (148SGS451).

When only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined (148SGS451; Y), the period of the normal timer effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS452), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is terminated. If the execution of the normal timer effect is not determined or the execution of the special timer effect is also determined (148SGS451; N), whether or not the execution of only the special timer effect is determined, that is, the first. It is determined whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B is set (148SGS453).

When the execution of only the special timer effect is determined (148SGS453; Y), the period of the special timer effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS454), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined to execute both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect (148SGS453; N), the image display device 5 displays the total value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period. (148SGS455), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is terminated.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed as the normal timer effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the normal timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS461). When the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148 SGS461; Y), the process proceeds to 148 SGS468, and when the normal timer effect process timer is not operating (148 SGS461; N), the value of the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer is set to -1. (148SGS462), and it is determined whether or not the timer waiting for the normal timer effect execution start has expired (148SGS463).

When the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer is not timer out (148SGS463; N), the normal timer effect execution process is terminated, and when the normal timer effect execution start wait timer is timer out (148SGS463; Y), the normal timer is used. Set the production process table (148SGS464). Then, the normal timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set normal timer effect process table is started (148SGS465).

In the normal timer effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data for performing the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). It is arranged.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS466). For example, the operation of the normal timer is started in the interface area 148SG005I displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS467), and the normal timer effect execution process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the 148SGS468, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the normal timer effect process timer to -1 based on the fact that the normal timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS468). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal timer effect process timer has timed out (148SGS469). When the normal timer effect process timer is out of timer (148SGS469; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (148SGS470).

When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (148SGS470; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the last normal timer effect process timer that has timered out (148SGS471). When the timer is out of the last normal timer effect effect process timer (148 SGS471; Y), the normal timer effect is ended and the normal timer effect execution process is ended (148 SGS479). The end of the normal timer effect means the end of the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I. Then, when it is not the last normal timer effect effect process timer (148SGS471; N) that the timer is out, the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

Further, in the case of the 148SGS470, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (148SGS470; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the last normal timer effect process timer has timered out. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the production start timing of the super reach (148SGS472). When the timer is out of the last normal timer effect effect process timer (148 SGS472; Y), the normal timer effect is ended and the normal timer effect execution process is ended (148 SGS479). If it is not the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS472; N) that the timer is out, the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

In the 148SGS473, the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (148SGS473). That is, the normal timer effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the normal timer effect process table to the normal timer effect process timer (148SGS474). Further, the effect device (effect component) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc., which are set next, and the process proceeds to 148SGS477.

When it is determined in the 148SGS469 that the normal timer effect process timer is not out of the timer (148SGS469; N), the effect control CPU 120 is the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the normal timer effect process timer. The component) is controlled (148SGS476), and the process proceeds to 148SGS477.

In the 148SGS477, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I changes to the reach notification mode, that is, whether or not it is the timer out timing of the normal timer in the normal timer effect. (148SGS477). When the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I is not the timing to change to the reach notification mode (148SGS477; N), the normal timer effect execution process is terminated and the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I is changed to the reach notification mode. In a certain case (148SGS477; Y), the display of the normal timer is changed to the reach notification mode with the character color determined by the variable display start setting process of 148SGS360 (see FIG. 10-9) (148SGS478), and the normal timer effect is produced. Ends the execution process.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the special timer effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the special timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS481). When the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS481; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS488, and when the special timer effect process timer is not operating (148SGS481; N), the value of the special timer effect execution start waiting timer is set to -1. (148SGS482), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting for the special timer effect execution start has expired (148SGS483).

When the special timer effect execution start waiting timer is not timered out (148SGS483; N), the special timer effect execution process is terminated, and when the special timer effect execution start waiting timer is timered out (148SGS483; Y), the special timer is executed. Set the production process table (148SGS484). Then, the special timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set special timer effect process table is started (148SGS485).

In the special timer effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and control of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R The sound control execution data for performing the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). It is arranged.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). It executes control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (148SGS486). For example, the image display device 5 displays the timer image 148SG005T (see FIG. 10-23 (B)) for the special timer effect, starts the operation of the special timer in the timer image 148SG005T (148SGS487), and produces the special timer. Ends the execution process.

On the other hand, in the 148SGS488, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the special timer effect process timer to -1 based on the fact that the special timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS488). Then, it is determined whether or not the special timer effect process timer has timed out (148SGS489). When the special timer effect process timer is out of timer (148SGS489; Y), it is determined whether or not the last special timer effect process timer has been out of the timer (148SGS490). When the timer is out of the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490; Y), the timer image 148SG005T is hidden from the image display device 5, the special timer effect is ended, and the special timer effect execution process is ended. (148SGS496).

Then, when it is not the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490; N) that the timer is out, the process data is switched (148SGS491). That is, the special timer effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the special timer effect process table to the special timer effect process timer (148SGS492). Further, the effect device (effect component) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc., which are set next, and the process proceeds to 148SGS495.

When it is determined in the 148SGS489 that the special timer effect process timer is not out of the timer (148SGS489; N), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the special timer effect process timer. (Part) is controlled (148SGS494), and the process proceeds to 148SGS495.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the button operation effect execution process for executing the button operation effect in the 148SGS495, and ends the special timer effect execution process.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the button operation effect execution process in FIG. 10-17. In the button operation effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS501). When the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS501; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS510, and when the button operation effect process timer is not operating (148SGS501; N), it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B. (148SGS502).

When it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS502; Y), the push button operation promotion image 148SG005P (see FIG. 10-23 (E)) is displayed on the image display device 5 to the player. To prompt the operation of the push button 31B (148SGS503), the process proceeds to 148SGS504. If it is not the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS502; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS504 without executing the processing of 148SGS503.

In the 148SGS504, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B is in the operation acceptance period (148SGS504). When the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is in progress (148SGS504; Y), it is further determined whether or not the push button 31B is operated (148SGS505). When there is no operation of the push button 31B (148SGS505; N), it is determined whether or not it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506). If it is not the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; N), the button operation effect execution process is ended, and if it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS507.

If the push button 31B is operated in the 148SGS505 (148SGS505; Y), the process proceeds to the 148SGS507 without executing the processing of the 148SGS506.

Then, in the 148SGS507, the effect control CPU 120 starts the button operation effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set button operation effect process table (148SGS508).

In the button operation effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and control of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. The sound control execution data for performing the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). It is arranged.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). It executes control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (148SGS509). For example, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect result of the button operation effect, and ends the button operation effect execution process.

Further, in the 148SGS510, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the button operation effect process timer to -1 based on the fact that the button operation effect process timer is in operation (148SGS510). Then, it is determined whether or not the button operation effect process timer has timed out (148SGS511).

When the button operation effect process timer has timed out (148SGS511; Y), it is further determined whether or not the button operation effect process timer that has timed out is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512). When the timer-out button operation effect process timer is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; Y), the button operation effect is ended by ending the display of the effect result of the button operation effect on the image display device 5. (148SGS517), and the button operation effect execution process is terminated.

If the button operation effect process timer out of the timer is not the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; N), the process data is switched (148SGS513). That is, the button operation effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the set button operation effect process table in the button operation effect process timer (148SGS514). Further, the effect device (effect component) is controlled (148 SGS515) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc., which are set next, and the button operation effect execution process is terminated.

When the button operation effect process timer is not timer-out in 148SGS511 (148SGS511; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the button operation effect process timer (148SGS516), and the button soothing effect execution process is performed. finish.

As described above, when the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment executes only the normal timer effect in the variation display of the variation pattern of the normal reach by executing the normal timer effect execution process or the special timer effect execution process, As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds from the fluctuation start timing. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the timing when the normal timer goes out of the timer), the display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the timing of the end of the fluctuation. There is.

In this way, when only the normal timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden in the image display device 5 from the fluctuation start timing to the fluctuation end timing. That is, the interface area 148SG005I is always displayed in the image display device 5 for the variation display of the variation pattern of the normal reach.

Further, when only the normal timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds from the fluctuation start timing as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B). .. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the timing when the normal timer goes out of the timer), the display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach. It has become like.

When only the normal timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the fluctuation start timing to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, while the interface area 148SG005I is displayed. The interface area 148SG005I is hidden in the image display device 5 from the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach to the end timing of the variable display.

That is, in the case where only the normal timer effect is executed among the normal timer effect and the special timer effect in the variation display in the feature unit 148SG in the present embodiment, the variation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach as described above. The timer is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (big hit expectation for each fluctuation pattern; super reach> normal reach), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach When the variation display is executed, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, while the interface area 148SG005I is not displayed when the variation display is executed in the normal reach variation pattern. Since it is not displayed, when the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display, the interface area 148SG005I is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display. ing.

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, when the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display, the interface area 148SG005I is put into the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display. Although the controlled mode is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the dynamic display. The jackpot gaming state may be controlled at a higher rate than in the case of

Further, in the case of executing only the special timer effect among the yoto timer effect and the special timer effect in the variation display in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (A), 7 from the variation start timing. Execution of timer effect suggestion effect is executed over a second. Next, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the special timer is operated on the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the timer-out of the special timer. The timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display ends) 3 seconds after the timer out (start timing of the cut-in effect) of the special timer.

Further, when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), the timer effect is extended for 10 seconds from the fluctuation start timing. Execute the execution suggestion effect. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the timing when the normal timer goes out of the timer), the display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach. It has become like.

The interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the fluctuation start timing to the start timing of the super reach reach effect, while the image display is performed from the start timing of the super reach reach effect to the end timing of the variation display. The interface area 148SG005I is hidden in device 5.

In addition, in the fluctuation display, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the special timer is operated on the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the timer-out of the special timer. The timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display ends) 3 seconds after the timer out (start timing of the cut-in effect) of the special timer.

When executing the special timer effect in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (A) and 10-20 (B), 10 from the timing 35 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Button operation effects are also executed over a second. Therefore, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the player is displayed by performing the button operation effect in parallel even during the special timer effect in which the timer operation period is longer than that of the normal timer effect. The display can be continuously noticed, and it is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorated.

The feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect. Is not limited to this, and a case where the button operation effect is not executed even during the special timer effect or a case where the button operation effect is executed during the normal timer effect may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, when only the normal timer effect is executed, after the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed for 5 seconds. , The normal timer effect is executed 5 seconds after the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect, that is, a period of 5 seconds is provided from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the normal timer effect (effect). (Start waiting period is 5 seconds), when only the special timer effect is executed, after executing the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect for 7 seconds, the timer effect execution suggestion effect is performed. The special timer effect is executed from 3 seconds after the end, that is, a period of 3 seconds is provided from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the special timer effect (the effect start waiting period is 3 seconds). When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, after executing the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect for 10 seconds, the end timing of the timer effect execution suggestion effect. The normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed (the effect start waiting period is 0 seconds).

In this way, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect differs depending on which timer effect is executed. In particular, when the special timer effect is executed, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is set longer than that when only the normal timer effect is executed. That is, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the special timer effect having a longer effect period than the normal timer effect is determined, it is longer than the case where the execution of only the normal timer effect is determined. The execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed over the period.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is executed during the variable display in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24. ..

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 (A) and 10-21 (B), when the variable display is started in the state where the interface area 148SG005I is displayed in the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed in.

When the player operates the push button 31B while the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (C). , The display of the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A on the image display device 5 as the first timer effect execution suggestion effect, or as shown in FIG. 10-21 (D), the image display device as the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. At 5, the display of the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is executed.

Next, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined in the fluctuation display, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-22 (B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or After the period of the normal timer effect (15 seconds, which is the period until the reach) is notified in the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started as the normal timer effect in the interface area 148SG005I.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C), when the normal timer is timered out at the timing when the decorative symbols are the combination of reach, the display of the normal timer is displayed in any of white, blue, and red. It changes to the reach notification mode.

Further, after reaching the reach, if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (D), the decorative symbol is derived and displayed as a combination of loss or jackpot. At this time, the interface area 148SG005I is continuously displayed without being hidden in the image display device 5.

When only the execution of the special timer effect is determined in the fluctuation display, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 (A) and 10-23 (B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the first timer effect is executed. 2 After the period of the special timer effect (45 seconds or 55 seconds, which is the period until the decorative symbol is derived and displayed) is notified in the timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the timer image 148SG005T is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5. At the same time as the display is started, the operation of the special timer is started in the timer image 148SG005T as a special timer effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 (C) to 10-23 (F), during the execution of the special timer effect, the operation of the special timer is continued in the timer image 148SG005T, and the reach effect of the super reach is produced. After the start, the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5 as a part of the button operation effect. As shown in FIG. 10-23 (D), the interface area 148SG005I is hidden from the image display device 5 at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the reach effect of the super reach, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B has elapsed, the effect result of the button operation effect is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (G), the chance-up effect is started at the timing when the special timer times out, and the timer image 148SG005T is hidden 3 seconds after the start of the chance-up effect. Will be done.

When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined to be executed in the fluctuation display, the first timer effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-24 (A) and 10-24 (B). After the sum of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period is notified in the suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started as the normal timer effect in the interface area 148SG005I. At the same time, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and the operation of the special timer is started in the timer image 148SG005T as a special timer effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (C), when the normal timer is timered out at the timing when the decorative symbols are the combination of reach, the display of the normal timer is displayed in any of white, blue, and red. It changes to the reach notification mode. After reaching the reach, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (D).

After that, in FIGS. 10-24 (D) to 10-24 (G), the button operation effect is executed as in FIGS. 10-23 (D) to 10-23 (G), and the special timer is set as a timer. The chance-up production starts from the timing when it goes out. Further, the timer image 148SG005T is hidden 3 seconds after the start of the chance-up effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the image display device 5 can display the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer and the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer, and the interface area during the variable display. When the 148SG005I is hidden, the interface area 148SG005I is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display. Therefore, whether or not the interface area 148SG005I is hidden is determined. Since the player can be attracted attention, the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, after the end of the normal timer effect, the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach. The present invention is not limited to this, and the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer is displayed at a timing other than the timing at which the reach effect of the super reach is started if the fluctuation is displayed after the end of the normal timer effect. It may be hidden.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the ratio of executing only the special timer effect and being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than the ratio of executing only the normal timer effect and being controlled to the jackpot game state. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect mode of the timer effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect, so that the normal timer is not executed. Even during the execution period of the special timer effect, which has a longer effect period than the effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the game becoming monotonous by executing the button operation effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-13, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the special timer effect is produced at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Is executed, and when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the game interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-24, in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect can be notified. When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the total value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period can be notified, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the period of the normal timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. Although the form of notifying the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of executing both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, the first In the 1-timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, only one of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period may be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are used. At the previous timing, the operation promotion image 148SG005P that urges the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the first timer effect execution suggestion effect are displayed based on the operation of the push button 31B. Since the 2 timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the player can pay attention to which of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed after the operation of the push button 31B. , You can improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the values of the normal timer and the special timer are subtracted toward 0 is illustrated as a predetermined operation of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect in the present invention. The present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined operation of the present invention may be to add the values of the normal timer and the special timer toward a specific value.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, a normal timer effect and a special timer effect will be exemplified as the predetermined effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined effect in the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display amount of a predetermined meter or gauge may be increased or decreased.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are exemplified as the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the present invention, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are executed by combining effects having different operation modes and effect modes (for example, the first predetermined effect is an effect in which the value of the timer is added, and the second predetermined effect is added. The effect may be to reduce the display amount of the meter).

In the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the operation promotion image 148SG005P of the same aspect is displayed on the image display device 5 in the case of executing the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the case of executing the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is different depending on whether the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. The operation promotion image 148SG005P of the embodiment may be displayed on the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed according to the mode of the displayed operation promotion image 148SG005P. , You can improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are always executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B, which is normal. Although the mode in which the timer effect and the special timer effect are started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect are produced even if the push button 31B is operated. A case may be provided in which the execution suggestion effect is not executed and the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is not started.

Further, as the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the special timer Targeting the timer image 148SG005T including the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect, the period of the normal timer effect, the period of the special timer effect, the total value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period, etc. Since it can be notified by the execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the game entertainment can be improved.

In particular, as the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, the period of the normal timer effect is targeted at only one of the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer. And the period of the special timer effect can be notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B. Therefore, these first timer effect execution suggestion effects and the second timer effect execution suggestion effects are produced. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the target interface area 148SG005I and the timer image 148SG005T, and to improve the game interest.

Although the feature portion 148SG of the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Even included in the present invention.

For example, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the special timer effect is executed for the cut-in effect which is the effect during the reach effect of the super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, as the modification 148SG-1, the special timer effect may be executed for the effect to be executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach. If the special timer effect can be executed for the effect executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach in this way, the special timer effect is applied to the effect executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach. When executing, that is, when executing the special timer effect while the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is being displayed (during the execution of the normal timer effect), and when executing the effect during the reach effect of the super reach (cut-in effect, etc.). The ratio controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on whether the special timer effect is executed for the target, that is, the special timer effect when the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is hidden. (For example, when executing the special timer effect for the effect to be executed during the reach effect of Super Reach, it is a bigger hit than when executing the special timer effect for the effect to be executed before the start of the reach effect of Super Reach. The rate of being controlled by the gaming state is high). By doing so, the player can be more focused on the special timer production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode of executing a normal timer effect or a special timer effect during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is not limited to this. An addition effect that adds the values of the timers operating as the effects may be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A) to 10-25 (D) as a modified example 155SG-1, an image display device is used during a period in which the timer is operating as a normal timer effect or a special timer effect. An operation promotion image 148SG005P that urges the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed on the 5. Then, after displaying the addition notification image 148SG005C indicating the value to be added to the operating timer on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C is displayed on the operating timer. It may be added as the value (special timer in this modification 155SG-1).

In the present modification 155SG-1, the embodiment in which the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition effect is a normal timer or the like. If the special timer is operating, it may be executed based on an opportunity other than the operation of the push button 31B.

Further, in the present modification 155SG-1, a mode in which the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C is added as the value of the special timer is illustrated as the addition effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition effect is not limited to this. The value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C may be added as the value of the normal timer, or may be added as the value of both the normal timer and the special timer.

Further, in the modified example 155SG-1, the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect, and the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect executed based on the operation of the push button 31B during the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may be an effect other than the addition effect. Further, a plurality of operation acceptance periods of the push button 31B during execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may be provided, and different effects may be executed based on the acceptance of the operation of the push button 31B in each operation acceptance period. .. Further, the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed from the same timing, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the 1-timer effect execution suggestion effect and the 2nd timer effect execution suggestion effect may be executed from different timings.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (G) as a modified example 155SG-2, for example, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is performed at the same timing as the feature unit 148SG. During the execution of the normal timer effect after execution (while the normal timer is operating), the operation promotion image 148SG005P for prompting the operation of the first push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation of the first push button 31B is displayed. The addition effect is executed based on the above.

Then, after adding the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C to the value of the short timer by executing the addition effect (display of the addition notification image 148SG005C in the image display device 5), the second push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5. The push button operation promotion image 149SG005P prompting the operation is displayed, and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second timer effect execution suggestion effect based on the operation of the second push button 31B. All you have to do is start the special timer production. In this way, by making it possible to execute the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect at different timings, the game depends on the timing at which the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw people's attention, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the modified example 155SG-2, the execution timings of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer is not limited to this. By providing a plurality of timings at which at least one of the effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect can be executed, the timer effect execution suggestion effect (and the normal timer effect and special) can be executed. It may be possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the timer effect) is executed.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the period from the start of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is constant (10). Although the embodiment (seconds) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 155SG-3, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect is produced after the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. By making the period until the execution of the second timer effect and the period from the execution of the second timer effect suggestion effect to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect different, the game becomes monotonous and the interest is reduced. It may be possible to prevent this from happening.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but for example, the game is played by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. Is possible to start, and one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to a display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display result derived to the display device is used. It can also be applied to slot machines where prizes can be generated accordingly.

When the gaming machine is used as a slot machine in this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (D) as a modified example 156SG-1, for example, the player gives an instruction of the slot machine. By operating the stop switch corresponding to each reel according to the above, the number of remaining games of ART is displayed on the image display device during ART in which the reels are stopped by a combination of bells, replays, and the like. Further, during the addition zone for adding the number of games remaining in the ART during the ART, the image display device also displays the number of games remaining in the addition zone.

When a specific role (for example, a rare role such as cherry or watermelon) is won when the number of remaining games of ART and the number of remaining games of the additional zone are displayed on the image display device in this way, the reel is stopped. Based on this, the additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device as the additional notification effect.

Then, after the additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device, the number of additional games indicated by the additional notification image 148SG005M may be added to both the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone. ..

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a normal timer effect or a special timer effect is executed during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 156SG-2. As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (D), a part of the displayed timer (a part of the normal timer in this modification 156SG-2) is used by the movable body 32 for a predetermined period. A concealment effect that conceals from the player may be executed. When the concealment effect is executed in this way, the concealment is released at least before the timing when the normal timer goes out, that is, the normal timer is partially concealed by the movable body 32. By preventing the timer from being out, the normal timer effect and the concealment effect can be preferably executed.

In the present modification 156SG-2, a mode in which a part of the normal timer is concealed by the movable body 32 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the special timer can be moved. It may be concealed by the body 32. Further, the portion concealed by the movable body 32 is not limited to a part of the normal timer or the special timer, but the entire normal timer or the special timer may be concealed by the movable body 32.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the normal timer effect is decorated and executed for the timing when the symbols are the combination of reach and the special timer effect is executed for the execution timing of the cut-in effect is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect may be other than the timing when these decorative symbols are a combination of reach and the execution timing of the cut-in effect. For example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the start timing of the special timer effect, and the special timer effect may be executed for the timing when the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the special timer effect having a high jackpot expectation by executing the normal timer effect having a low jackpot expectation, so that the player's expectation can be preferably expressed. Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed during the variable display in which the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is executed is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the first timer effect execution suggestion effect are variable displays prior to the variable display that executes the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. It may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect over a plurality of variable displays, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is surely executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may not be executed. Good.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the normal timer and the special timer are hidden from the image display device 5 at different timings is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing at which the normal timer and the special timer are hidden from the image display device 5 may be the same. By doing so, for example, the player can pay attention to an important effect indicating whether or not the variable display result such as the reach effect of the super reach is a big hit, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are started from the timing when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are completed is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are set for a predetermined period (for example, from 0.5 seconds) after the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are completed. It may start after 10 seconds). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect during the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a normal timer effect or a special timer effect can be executed during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these normal timer effects and the normal timer effect The special timer effect may be executed as an effect other than during the variable display such as during a big hit game. For example, when the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed during the big hit game, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are notified that the game state is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed. The jackpot game may be executed for an effect of notifying that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the value of each timer is subtracted toward 0 as a normal timer effect or a special timer effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, it may be possible to execute an effect (freeze effect) in which the value of each timer is stopped for a certain period of time. In addition, when the freeze effect can be executed in this way, a case is provided in which a part of the value of each timer is concealed by the movable body 32 as shown in the modified example 156SG-2, so that the timer is at any timing. The player may be able to pay more attention to whether or not the effect targeted by the effect is executed.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pachinko gaming machine. A display means different from that of the image display device 5 may be separately provided in 1 so that the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed by the display means. By doing so, it is possible to give a special feeling to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, and it is possible to secure an area for displaying other effects on the image display device 5, so that the pachinko machine can be used. The effect of the game machine 1 can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which at least a part of the execution period of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect overlaps, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is normal. The timer effect and the special timer effect may be executed so that there is no overlapping period. In such a case, for example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the special timer effect, that is, the special timer may be activated when the normal timer goes out.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is different depending on the execution / non-execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is illustrated, but as described above, the special timer effect By executing the normal timer effect for the target, the normal timer effect may be an effect that simply suggests the execution of another effect, and may not be related to the ratio controlled by the jackpot game state.

Further, in the feature unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer can be displayed on the image display device 5, and whether or not the interface area 148SG005I is hidden. Although the mode in which the ratio of the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the mode is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an image display of a timer image including a special timer having a different target effect is displayed. A plurality of timer images can be displayed on the device 5 (for example, three timer images are displayed on the image display device 5, and the first timer image (first special timer) is used for the first pseudo-continuous production and the second timer image. (The second special timer) is for the second pseudo-continuous production, and the third timer image (third special timer) is for the super reach reach production.) Even if each special timer is activated. Good. Further, when a plurality of timer images 148SG005T can be displayed in this way, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be different depending on the number of displayed timer images 148SG005T.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (feature portion 31AK in FIGS. 8 to 8-12), and the main substrate 11 ( In the CPU 103), any one of a plurality of set values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set secret value obtained by converting the set set value is stored in the RAM 102, and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). On the side, a form (feature part 122SG in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27) that can execute a suggestion effect (morning one background effect) that suggests a set value, a normal timer effect or special during variable display. Although the form in which the timer effect can be executed (feature section 148SG in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-28) has been disclosed, a plurality of feature sections among these feature sections may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the feature unit 122SG and the feature unit 148SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, and the effects related to the normal timer effect and the special timer effect (button operation effect, cut-in effect). , Timer effect execution suggestion effect, etc.) and the determination ratio of each effect mode may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, conventionally, as a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-23222. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-23222, it is not possible to draw the player's attention to the first predetermined display or the second predetermined display after the specific mode is adopted, and the gaming interest is improved. There is a problem that it cannot be done. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of the invention 148SG for solving the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
An image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5) and
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect or a cut-in effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and a predetermined display (for example, a normal timer or a special timer) displayed on the image display means is used. Performs the predetermined operation (for example, the operation of subtracting the value of the normal timer or special timer) and sets the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific mode (for example, timer out of the normal timer or special timer (set the value of the normal timer or special timer to 0). A predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect) can be executed in response to the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display shown in FIG. 10-14. The part that executes the middle production process) and
With
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between the case where the second predetermined display is hidden and the case where the second predetermined display is not hidden (for example, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display). If so, the part where the interface area 148SG005I is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is hidden, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as means 2 of the invention 148SG,
When the second predetermined display is hidden, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the second predetermined display is not hidden (for example, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display). If so, the part where the interface area 148SG005I is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is hidden, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, as means 3 of the invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using the first predetermined display when the second predetermined display is non-display is controlled to be in a more advantageous state than the predetermined effect using the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display. (For example, as shown in the modification 148SG-1, when the special timer effect is executed for the effect to be executed during the reach effect of the super reach, it is executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the special timer effect is executed for the effect to be performed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the player can pay attention to the production mode of the predetermined effect using the first predetermined display.

Further, as means 4 of the invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using only the first predetermined display has a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the predetermined effect using only the second predetermined display (for example, a big hit by executing only the special timer effect). The part where the ratio controlled to the game state is set higher than the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state by executing only the normal timer effect)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to the production mode of a predetermined effect.

Further, as means 5 of the invention 148SG,
A motion detecting means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting motion is provided.
The effect executing means can execute an operation corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on the detection result of the motion detecting means.
In the first predetermined display, the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer effect to the combination of the reach of the decorative symbols) elapses as the predetermined effect. It is a display that becomes the specific mode when
In the second predetermined display, the cut-in effect starts from the start of the special timer effect as shown in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B)), which is a longer period than the first period as the predetermined effect. It is a display that becomes the specific mode when 45 seconds or 55 seconds until it is completed).
During the second period, the ratio of the operation corresponding effect being executed is higher than that of the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect. Is executed, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game during a predetermined production.

Further, conventionally, as a game machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-79866. However, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-79866, the effect of the effect due to the difference in the effect mode of the predetermined display is insufficient, so that the player cannot pay attention to the predetermined display, which is interesting. There is a problem that it cannot be improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of the invention 155SG for solving the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SGS005T including a special timer and an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer).
A predetermined operation using a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect or cut-in effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state and a predetermined display displayed on the display means in response to the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, A predetermined mode in which the value of the normal timer or special timer is subtracted) is performed and the display mode of the predetermined display is set to a specific mode (for example, the normal timer or special timer is set to timer out (the value of the normal timer or special timer is set to 0)). An effect execution means that can at least execute an effect (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect) (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIGS. 10-14).
With
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a special timer effect) having a different effect mode from the first predetermined effect.
Before executing the predetermined effect, the effect executing means has a first special effect (for example, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect) and a second special effect (for example, an effect mode different from that of the first special effect). It is possible to execute a special effect including the second timer effect execution suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process shown in FIGS. 10-15).
When the second predetermined effect is executed, it is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the first predetermined effect is executed (for example, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the second timer effect is executed. The part where the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed),
When the second special effect is executed, the second predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first special effect is executed (for example, the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed). In this case, the part controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Can be improved.

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 155SG,
The special effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the first timer effect execution suggestion is performed before the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. The part that executes the production and the second timer production suggestion effect),
The effect executing means can execute the special effect at different timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 as a modified example 155SG-2, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect and a second timer effect execution suggestion effect. The part where the execution timing is different from
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the player can pay attention to the timing at which the special effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 155SG,
The period from the execution of the first special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect is different from the period from the execution of the second special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a modification). As 155SG-3, the period from the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, and the period from the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect to the normal timer effect and the special timer. The part that makes the period until the production is executed different)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in the period from the execution of the special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect, the game becomes monotonous and the game interest is reduced. It can be prevented from being stored.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 155SG,
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer).
The special effect is an effect that suggests a period of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), a period of the normal timer effect and a period of the special timer effect. Is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
The effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed for at least one of the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)). The part in which the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect are notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
As the special effect, it is possible to suggest a total value of the period of the predetermined effect for the first predetermined display and the period of the predetermined effect for the second predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 10-24 (A)). As shown in the above, the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a total value of a predetermined effect period for the first predetermined display and a predetermined effect period for the second predetermined effect is suggested. Therefore, the game entertainment can be improved.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 155SG,
A motion detecting means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting motion is provided.
The effect executing means has a common effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B)) based on the detection result of the motion detecting means at the timing before the execution of the first special effect and the second special effect. A game machine characterized in that the image display device 5 can execute an operation promotion image (a portion for displaying an operation promotion image 148SG005P) that urges a player to operate the push button 31B) is described. For example, since the player can pay attention to which of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed after the common effect, it is possible to improve the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
At least the first numerical value display area (for example, the interface area 18SG005I including the normal timer and the remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and the second numerical value display area (for example, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer) and A display means (for example, an image display device 5) having a modified example 156SG-1 with a display area for the number of remaining games in the additional zone, and
A predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect, a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modified example 156SG-1) in which a numerical value is updated to a specific value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area. A portion in which the number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone) and a special effect (for example, FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect are shown. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, the portion that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) and CPU120 for production control) and
With
As the special effect, the effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect for the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the period of the normal timer effect, the period of the special timer effect, the period of the normal timer effect, and the period of the special timer effect. As shown in the part where the total value is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B and the modification 156-1, the number of additional games is the number of remaining games of ART and the additional zone. The part to be added to both the number of remaining games),
further,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
It is characterized by that.

According to this feature, as a special effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area are suggested targets, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

Further, the predetermined effect and the title notification may be associated with each other. For example, the title notification may be executed during the execution of the predetermined effect, and the notification mode of the title notification may be changed after the predetermined effect is completed. By doing so, it is possible to infer whether or not the mode of title notification changes after the execution of the predetermined effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of improving the interest, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine). There,
At least the first numerical value display area (for example, the interface area 18SG005I including the normal timer and the remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and the second numerical value display area (for example, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer) and A display means (for example, an image display device 5) having a modified example 156SG-1 with a display area for the number of remaining games in the additional zone, and
A predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect, a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modified example 156SG-1) in which a numerical value is updated to a specific value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area. A portion in which the number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone) and a special effect (for example, FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect are shown. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, the portion that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) and CPU120 for production control) and
With
As the special effect, the effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect for the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the period of the normal timer effect, the period of the special timer effect, the period of the normal timer effect, and the period of the special timer effect. As shown in the part where the total value is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B and the modification 156-1, the number of additional games is the number of remaining games of ART and the additional zone. The part to be added to both the number of remaining games) A game machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 11-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 11-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 11-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided. , It also has a function to display various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, and is used as a game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to the 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 11-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and is a main substrate. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 11-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for this purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk of the game hall or the like determines the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like. The operating voltage of is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. As shown in FIG. 2, the outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 11-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 11-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the same are connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball-out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball-out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control computer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are performed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is awarded, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail in FIGS. 11-22 and 11-34 to 36.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 11-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball burnout LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 11-3.

The card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the card unit. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066 are provided with a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball output rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the ball output rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

11-4 (A) to 11-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 11-4 (A) to 11-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-4 (A) to 11-4 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-4 (A) to 11-4 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, information on winning a game, for example, the number of winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening The number of prize balls by winning the (attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input, the number of launched balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 shows the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls, is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker). A certain role ratio (%) and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning a prize in the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the sum of the number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and as the passable width of the game ball fluctuates, the expected winning ratio of the game ball fluctuates. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. Therefore, the expected winning ratio of game balls is a certain amount.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the prizes of the game, regarding the consecutive ratio and the role ratio, the prize balls by winning the first starting prize opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls. The number (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (electric chew), and the prize by winning the big prize opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power by winning the first start winning opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

The display monitor 21TM029 is a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning the big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the joint ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the prize balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting the total number and performing the aggregation at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces).

A storage area for storing information related to the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general winning ball, a first starting winning opening prize ball, an ordinary electric role prize ball, and a special electric role. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of game media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are rounded down) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. The accessory ratio is calculated as 70% from the 70 obtained here. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. The accessory ratio is calculated as 70% from the 70 obtained here. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, division may be performed by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the operation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of balls acquired as a character, the lower 1 byte of 10h is truncated, and the number of balls acquired as a character is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, this 2 is divided by 156 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 21TM201 is made of a material having translucency, so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be visually recognized. The board case 21TM201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029. The "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of balls acquired as a character, the lower 1 byte of 10h is truncated, and the number of balls acquired as a character is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, this 2 is divided by 156 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball. The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be described further later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100 and the decimal point is rounded down so that 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

In this embodiment, the sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of prize balls for each is calculated individually based on the detection result. , Other inventions are not limited to this, and the detection result is obtained by using a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the game medium winning the electric chew merges. The number of winning balls and the number of consecutive winning balls may be totaled based on the above.

Hereinafter, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the display of the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 11-3). On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided.

The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. In this embodiment, a form in which the number of winnings of the large winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the large winning number counter is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and these first major inventions are made. A first large prize number counter that totals the number of prizes in the winning opening and a second large winning number counter that totals the number of winnings in the second large winning opening are separately provided to win a prize in the first large winning opening. The number and the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be totaled individually, and the total number of each of these winnings may be used as the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 11-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is 21TM052, which is a switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, or when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or combination ratio. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the main substrate 11 is housed in the substrate case 21TM201. A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pin 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 21TM201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 21TM011S is attached to the substrate case 21TM201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 21TM011S.

The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 21TM029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) is displayed. The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit has the aggregated setting values (1 to 6) and the RAM clear notification (“C”” that notifies that the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode is completed. ) Is displayed, the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C of the third digit, and the fourth display unit 21TM029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit of the fifth digit are displayed. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on 21TM029E. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term combination ratio is displayed. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative total ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

The main board 11 enters the 4th general winning opening from the large winning opening (attacker), the 1st starting winning opening, the 2nd starting winning opening, and the 1st general winning opening in calculating the joint ratio, the winning ratio, and the base. The number of game balls that have entered and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the outlet are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning port switch to a fourth general winning port switch, and an outlet switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to check the status of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal).

In this switch processing, it is specified which approach region the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the 2nd general winning opening switch, the 3rd general winning opening switch, and the 4th general winning opening switch, the 1st general winning number counter, the 2nd general winning number counter, and the 3rd general winning number counter. When the values of the counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added and the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter the game ball into each approach area. The number (the number of game balls won in each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to the increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in Fig. 11-6, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is the prize balls by winning the general winning opening (1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening (sode)). ), 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting winning opening (heso)), ordinary electric prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric prize ball (to attacker) The number of prize balls (prize balls by winning a prize). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first start winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first start are calculated individually. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, the RAM 102 has a continuous ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). It has a base storage area for storing. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning games for each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total, and for 10 sets. And the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio are stored in the connection ratio combination storage area. The continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratios and the total totals of 10 sets and the total cumulative ratio is composed of a counter having a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and linkage ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers.

Further, in the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time are calculated. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter of up to 1 byte.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 11-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number; hereinafter, Of the same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 specifies this ROM area to read data from the ROM 101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are used. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the above control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets) A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a storage area for 10 sets of joint ratios are provided. Data having different starting addresses of subroutines are stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area.

In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 11-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E may be used.
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches between the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18B, the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is displayed by the display changeover switch 21TM030. Based on the operation of, the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 display when the set value is "1", and when the set value is "2" Short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative rendezvous, total cumulative role ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ream ratio, total cumulative total when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "4", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "4".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "4", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "5", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "5".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "5", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "6".

Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "6", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the display monitor 21TM029 of this embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this. In 21TM029, it may be possible to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, is calculated and the combination ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is illustrated. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, on the display monitor 21TM029, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. , Other inventions are not limited to this, and the short-term connection ratio and short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio and total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and base 1 and base 2 are short-term consecutive ratios. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets and the storage area of the continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the numbers are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 11-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, weighting is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operation (step S21TM1040).

Then, after the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (initialization of the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S21TM1050), the CPU 103 presses the RAM 102. Set to the accessible state (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs a clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 (clear signal) input via the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

When the ON state is detected in the status check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. .. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). As a result, the game machine, which is the output source of these signals, changes the settings based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to identify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is controlled. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command for designating that the setting change mode has been controlled as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is waited for (step S21TM1160), and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is waited for (step S21TM1180).

In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, display control is executed in which the displayed setting value is incremented by 1 each time a setting change operation is received, and is returned to 1 after reaching 6.

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is set. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value is fixed by overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed set value. Then, the fixed set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match. As a result, the set value of the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 11-13 described later.

When the OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 is set so that the set value can be confirmed. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and also outputs a security signal as the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). As a result, the game machine, which is the output source of these signals, changes the settings based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to identify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command for designating that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is waited for (step S21TM1240).

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the CPU 103 is described in FIG. 11- The process proceeds to the process of determining whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed in step S21TM1320 shown in 13.

When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 is a clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 11-13. (Setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) Check the state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 (step S21TM1310).

In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (see FIG. 11-14). Whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area is determined based on whether or not the check data is stored (step S21TM1320).

In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned off. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process shifts to the setting confirmation mode and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same process in the power failure detection process. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (processes of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, regulatory member state specification flag, initialized flag, etc.), output. The area where the output status of the port is saved (output port buffer), the part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and so on. The setting value storage area (the area where the fixed setting value is stored) is also included in the part that should not be initialized. In addition, an area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process in step S21TM1470.

In step S21TM1310, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or when backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), the initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 Is also OFF, and on condition that NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the initialization of step S21TM1410 is immediately performed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on the case where the process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting is changed. Settings are made based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the mode and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that the mode shifts to the confirmation mode and NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode is completed.

In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each total for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 is set in the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

Further, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set in the flag.

In this embodiment, a mode of shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode is provided on the condition that the game machine frame 3 is open (the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). , It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process in step S21TM1470.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 11-19 and 11-21). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 sets the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing the process according to, for example, the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is one round (taking the random number for determining the normal symbol hit). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then an initialization command at power-on. (Step S21TM1460), the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM1370 or step). S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as a lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, and 8R can be specified. , It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as a game effect lamp 9.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 is determined via the circuit 110 (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

For example, the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown). Based on the detection of radio waves, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins in any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , 2nd start port switch 22B, count switch 23, 1st general winning opening switch to 4th general winning opening switch When a detection signal is input, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal The prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 displays and monitors the winning information processing (step S21TM1640) for calculating the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base, and the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) to be displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the explanation of step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and a step in the next timer interrupt is performed. The game may be stopped (switch processing is not executed) in S21TM1615. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, and payout information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) of the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and changes the display of the normal symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables the tilting motion setting of one side.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off after that. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is completed is completed. The set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12 by including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command such as the above and transmitting the command. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute an effect suggesting a set value at various timings such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

As shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 11-4, the range of random numbers determined to be big hits differs depending on the set value. For example, an event in which the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of starting prize before the setting change is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, but is judged to be out of order in relation to the setting value after the change. On the contrary, although it is determined to be out of order in relation to the set value before the change, an event may occur in which it is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of the start winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process process is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the hold memory (hold memory of special symbol, hold memory of normal symbol) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the number of hold memory is set to the initial value (0). There is.

Further, during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission of step S21TM1540 being not performed, the switch processing (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed, and the start winning prize Passing through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the random numbers have not been updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning prize during the period controlled by the setting change mode, the same random number value will be obtained regardless of the timing of the start winning prize, and the game will be played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start prize and gate passage are invalidated.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk of the game hall or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), a clerk at the amusement park or the like performs a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this setting value). In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1150).

In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), the CPU 103 is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. Every time an operation is detected, the numerical value (set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Updates are displayed as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (setting value "1" in this example) itself stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (set value "1" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. It is changed (overwritten) to the numerical value (in this example, the setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (D), the CPU 103 enters the set value storage area of the RAM 102 based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like (YES in step S21TM1180). The stored setting value (setting value "1" in this example) is a numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ) Is changed (overwritten), and the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and that the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Notification of completion of setting) (step S21TM1200).

After the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area). Neither the stored setting value "2") nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value "2" in this example) is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is terminated, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state at the time of power failure stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set to initialize the game state, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clear processing is completed, the CPU 103 notifies the clerk of the amusement park that the RAM clear processing has been executed (RAM clear notification) by displaying "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A. (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the clerk of the amusement park or the like knows that the setting change mode is finished (the set value is fixed) and the initialization process is executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, the game can be played, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change mode of this embodiment, a mode of displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is illustrated as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, but other inventions have this. The initial display displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the above, and is the most advantageous setting value for the player (“6” in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

Further, the CPU 103 is associated with the end of the setting change mode, and after the RAM clear notification, the display monitor 21TM029 has a set value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) corresponding to the fixed ratio and the combination. It is also possible to display each aggregated value such as ratio and base. Further, for each set value, each aggregated value such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set value).

If the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the set value of the RAM 102 is due to the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk at the game hall, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process). When the power is turned on at (when N is set in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processes of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 are executed by the CPU 103, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set value). “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A) (in this example, the setting value). The set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1230).

In addition, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk at the amusement park, the first display unit The numerical value displayed on 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value "1" stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. Assuming that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk of the amusement park while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example). Then, if the setting value "1") stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, there is a risk of misunderstanding that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting). The setting value "1") stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the process of step S21TM1320 or later, the game can be played, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to RAM clear unless it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information). Neither the set value "1" stored in the temporary storage area nor the set value (set value "1" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

As shown above, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) is satisfied. ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The clerk of the amusement park turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on in order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, an operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. Do not perform the operation of. In this way, the clerk of the amusement park can select whether to control the game machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (or not to control either), and also perform the initialization process. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization process is not required to shift the game machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed unless it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, when the clerk of the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, even if the power is turned off and then the power is turned on to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the game state remains. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement park side, the setting confirmation mode makes it possible to confirm the set value without any trouble.

Further, the CPU 103 has a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. corresponding to the set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 when the setting confirmation mode ends. It is also possible to display each aggregated value of. Further, for each set value, each aggregated value such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set value).

FIG. 11-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of the transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 11-17 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode is controlled, and FIG. 11-17 (2) shows an image display when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-17 (1) (A), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (1), for effect control based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being changed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being changed") notifying that the speakers 8L and 8R have changed to the setting change mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting change mode, so that the setting can be changed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 11-17 (1) (B), other display information (for example, an effect symbol, a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, if the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, the display control unit 123). Until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5) until the image display device 5 can be controlled). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice notifying that the setting change mode has been entered from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or CPU103 in step S21TM1460). (Based on receiving the power-on initialization command transmitted from the effect control board 12), the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has terminated the setting change mode. It is possible to notify that fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting change completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting change mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the setting change mode is notified that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended, so that the setting change mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with (execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demo screen, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-17 (2) (A), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), for effect control based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being confirmed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being confirmed") indicating that the speakers 8L and 8R have shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode, so that the setting confirmation can be performed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, if the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, the display control unit 123). Until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5) until the image display device 5 can be controlled). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speakers 8L and 8R output a voice notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is set to emit light in a predetermined manner (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of the backup command at the time of power failure recovery or the initialization command at the time of power on, which is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has been completed and notify the fact. For example, a voice (for example, a voice saying "setting is being confirmed") that displays the characters "setting confirmation completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting confirmation mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the setting confirmation mode is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting confirmation mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and the game is ready to be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with (execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demo screen, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 11-18 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-18 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 11-18 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 11-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 11-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". The mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (2), and FIG. 11-, respectively. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 30%). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 30%).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

Next, the prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 11-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. In addition, the connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed via the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted by one signal line. The connection confirmation signal can be output by setting an initial value in the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically). Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380, similarly to the game control microcomputer 100. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set 8-bit data contents. Will be done.

The connection confirmation command is issued from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1s) in order to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is the control command to be sent. The content of the data of the connection confirmation command is "A0 (H)", that is, "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. This is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which the prize ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit "x" Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. When a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected by the game control microcomputer. You can notify 100.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. .. The content of the prize ball number command data is "5x (H)", that is, "0101xxxxxx". In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is played by the prize opening switch corresponding to the general prize opening 10. When it is detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the prize ball number command "0100111" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the general prize opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, the prize ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls. The prize ball number command "01011110" for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. The connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are configured so that either of them is transmitted as a prize ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fact that the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning or the like) is satisfied. In this embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the upper 4 bits are shared and the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits. You may do so.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, the prize ball end command is not configured to set data indicating error information. This is because the prize ball end command is sent only once when the prize ball operation ends, so even if the error information is not sent at that timing, the data indicating the error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command. Because it is possible to do so. In addition, data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the prize ball operation. It is a control command to be sent based on what you have done. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. When a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. The content of the error can also be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. Similar to the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by making the contents of the lower 4 bits different according to the error state (different predetermined bits). Further, the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command, and the prize ball end command are configured so that any command is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in the state in which the prize ball operation cannot be executed due to an error, but also in the state in which the prize ball operation is being executed.

The command for preparing the prize ball is sent in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the fact that an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

FIG. 11-21 is a block diagram showing a control signal shown in FIG. 11-19 and a signal line used for transmitting and receiving a control command shown in FIG. 11-20. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Further, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. To. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the game control microcomputer 100. It is input to 21TM505. Note that FIG. 11-21 shows two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting the prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting the received ACK signal) as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received by one signal line.

Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal consists of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball count command, and the received ACK signal consists of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

FIG. 11-22 is a sequence diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 11-22, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not broken via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process.

Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 is first set to prohibit interrupts (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the process of setting the built-in device register in step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, in order to set the register setting for setting the channel to be used in the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the occurrence of interrupt, and the interrupt vector. Register setting is done. Then, the interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

The interrupt vector set in the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process that controls the payout means (at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal regarding prize ball payout from the main board, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request. The processing to be performed may be included.) Is executed.

In this embodiment, the interrupt mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt process based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, the interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt that occurs when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. ..

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set in the flag and counter of the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter in the prize ball unpaid number counter.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for.

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initially set, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initially sets the priority of the interrupt process to be executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initially sets the priority of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority initial setting process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied (step S21TM1920). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of timer interrupt is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when the timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 11-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when the control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1, the state of the input port is not checked directly, but the input state. Check the status of the flag.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 should be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process that controls to pay out the loaned balls in response to the ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and controls to pay out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). In addition, information output processing for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the game machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for lighting the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, out-of-ball error, prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in the error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 controls in the display control process to light the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. Further, when the prize ball payout is completed, control is performed to turn off the prize ball LED21TM053.

Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer include payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And is updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to send and receive various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to receive the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 11-20 from the game control microcomputer 100. When the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a reception interrupt process when it identifies that the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball number command in the interrupt processing at the time of reception. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the number of prize balls is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid quantity counter.

FIG. 11-25 shows the ball lending executed between the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the communication process of. Here, as will be described later, as a method of restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method shown below.

First, (1) The first ball lending restriction method is a payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer) from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). In addition, (2) the second ball lending restriction method is a PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 provided with the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Further, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method is the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, it may not be possible to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, the ball lending in the game machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. Hereinafter, the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described.

FIG. 11-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11 of the game machine, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Based on the fact that the power supply to the game machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal in the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on by the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 11-13 (see FIG. 11-19). When the power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as the connection signal.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 transmits the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and the card unit 21TM050 starts from the card unit 21TM050. When the falling edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 11-27.

11-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the processing of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the payout of the game medium. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

When the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 11-28. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

11-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 11-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). It is not in the state, but in the OFF state.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on the resumption of reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output the PRDY signal (turn it on) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 11-29. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is said that the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be operated as long as possible, the game machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, the game machine frame 3 is usually open during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the game machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 11-29 shows the main board when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), and the card unit 21TM050.

The example of FIG. 11-29 is based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period during which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but turned off.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Since both the signal and the EXE signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball is played even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (payment of game media) is not executed.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used as the game machine frame 3 (or glass door frame 3a). By detecting the open state of the door, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Then, when the clerk of the amusement park or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the clerk of the game hall closes the game machine frame 3 in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor. The 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closure of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output the PRDY signal (turn it on) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when a different configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. That is, during the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used as the game machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 11-30. In the example shown in FIG. 11-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

FIG. 11-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 11-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state based on the connection confirmation signal being in the ON state. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). When it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned ON regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 causes the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Here, the payout control board 21TM037 has the PRDY signal in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal in the ON state, but has not received the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). It is in a state of being electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 is set even when the BRQ signal is ON (that is, a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the EXS signal is not turned on but is turned off. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the CPU 103 While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when a predetermined time elapses (when the timer set to the predetermined value times out) while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON. To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the BRQ signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent payout control of the ball lending is executed.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 11-30 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output the PRDY signal (turn it on) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when a different configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 11-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in FIG. 11-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal remains OFF (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out) after the BRQ signal is turned ON, the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. Even after a predetermined time elapses, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may also be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The XS signal may be turned on based on the fact that all of them are in the ON state. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending process according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed). (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute ball lending restriction during setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 11-31. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

11-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and that the connection confirmation command is received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state (that is, the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) in the VL signal, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 and the game control microcomputer 100). When the computer is electrically connected) and the connection confirmation command is being received, the PRDY signal is displayed regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 causes the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 has an EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. When the BRQ signal falling (OFF) from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. The PRDY signal and the EXE signal are turned on on the control microcomputer 21TM370 side. In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the payout control of the game medium, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be set. It is possible to reduce the control burden for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period. In addition, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to also check the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1, and improve workability. it can.

The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is continuously received from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal ON state when the payout operation is possible.

When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. .. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Further, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is finished and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXE signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(How to resume ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on thereafter, FIG. 11-32 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the power failure occurring during the payout of the game medium, and after the power is turned on, the setting is controlled and set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Resume the suspended payout after exiting the change mode or setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 11-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the processing of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in a stopped state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, the payout control is performed based on the fact that the power supply is restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is terminated (the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the PRDY signal is in the ON state). The microcomputer 21TM370 for driving the payout motor 21TM289 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. Perform payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the power off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the setting is set even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of the subsequent power restoration. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-32, the payout process is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is used. An example was shown in which the suspended payout process is resumed after the end of, but this power off is due to the clerk of the amusement park turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power cut that occurs, or it may be a power cut that occurs when the power switch 21TM055 is turned off when the amusement park is closed. Further, not only when the power is cut off, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the payout process. Depending on the state detected, the payout process that is being executed is interrupted, and then it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the interrupted payout process is performed. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power failure)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power supply is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored is specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

11-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly terminates (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid quantity data is not stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid quantity storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not paid out.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the processing of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in a stopped state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, the predetermined number to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode due to the power restoration). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid pieces that were not paid out due to the cancellation (forced termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done. In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and then when the power is restored, the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode or the setting By not executing the payout for the number of unpaid pieces after the confirmation mode ends, the control of backing up the data of the number of unpaid pieces and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the power is cut off during payout, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not backed up, so that the payout during execution is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle. Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIGS. 11-32, when the power is cut off, the data of the number of unpaid data is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. On condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the game medium equivalent to the unpaid number is paid out based on the backed up unpaid number data (the payout is restarted based on the backup data), while after the power is restored. When controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game medium equivalent to the number of unpaid pieces is not paid out (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not completed. It is also possible not to pay out the game medium equivalent to the number of payouts.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 11-33 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output the PRDY signal (turn it on) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 11-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 11-34 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 11-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time.

Although not shown, there is a prize during execution of the connection confirmation communication process (between the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and issues the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(No prizes in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 11-35 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process.

As described above, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the first general winning port switch to the fourth until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 11-13. The switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIGS. 11-14) for confirming the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like is not executed. The process (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 11-14) and the like are not executed either. Therefore, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the detection signal output from each switch is not detected, and the big hit determination process or the like is not executed. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch processing is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base aggregation is not executed. That is, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to aggregate each item such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Therefore, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, each of these items It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 because it is out of the aggregation period.

During the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 invalidates the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening by not executing the switch processing and the special symbol process processing. And. That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the jackpot determination process or the like is not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100 has not been received. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening, the prize ball payout control is not executed.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 It is possible to execute switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal), it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening, and it is possible to send a prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. In addition, special symbol process processing including jackpot determination processing can be executed.

The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that receives the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning openings (when winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing the switch process, and the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) Pay out the game medium. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the switch processing is executed within the setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, the big hit judgment random number is extracted, and the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number. And, the setting value before the change will be a big hit, but the setting value after the change (the setting value after confirmation) will not be a big hit. In some cases, the big hit judgment will be executed based on the random number for big hit judgment, or conversely, before the change. The set value of is not a big hit, but the changed set value (set value after confirmation) may be a big hit. In some cases, the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number. That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the game hall may suffer a disadvantage.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the prize ball is not paid out based on the passing of the game ball through each winning opening, and the big hit determination process is not executed. In addition to preventing the relationship between the execution timing and the set value from becoming complicated, the disadvantage of the player or the amusement park is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. Assuming that the setting confirmation mode is different from the setting change mode, it can be controlled not when the power is turned on but when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode is also switch processing. If the special symbol process processing can be executed, a control completely different from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on as in the setting change mode, and the prize ball is not paid out based on the passing of the game ball through each winning opening, and the jackpot determination is made. By not executing the processing, the processing is standardized and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). .. Therefore, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, etc., is the game stop error occurring during the period during which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? When it is determined whether or not (step S21TM1615) and a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing. Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs depending on whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the game stop error occurs.

By stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 sends the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the prize ball number command of, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed. It is possible to invalidate the prize.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed). .. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 11-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , Switch processing and special symbol process processing should not be executed.

Further, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute switch processing when controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning opening). May be. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped to control the payout. The microcomputer 21TM370 is not allowed to execute the payout control, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process processing is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payment restriction method during detection of opening of game machine frame / door frame)
FIG. 11-36 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during detection of opening of the game machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. Receive the connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the game machine frame 3 or the glass door The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

In the state where the game machine frame 3 is open (and the glass door frame 3a is open if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down and the upper plate on which the prize balls that have flowed down are stored are not physically connected, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it. Here, with the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a open, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but for the game machine. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is issued to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

In this way, during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 still uses the payout motor 21TM289. The prize ball payout control is not executed without driving. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute control of payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. .. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize ball and the prize ball is paid out. Of the number specified by the number command, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven and the payout control of the game medium corresponding to the unpaid number is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during detection of opening of the game machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 11-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is said to be impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the game is played during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The machine frame 3 is usually open. During the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted from being driven so that the prize balls are not paid out. As a result, the payout of prize balls is restricted during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

Next, control when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2).

11-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power outage in separate charts based on the difference in the situation when the power outage occurs. The pattern related to the power failure shown in FIG. 11-37 (1) shows the control when the power is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is not confirmed" is not performed while the "setting value is being changed". The time setting value is the setting value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the pattern related to the power failure shown in FIG. 11-37 (2) shows the control when the power supply is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is confirmed" is performed while the "setting value is being changed". The set value at the time of power failure is the set value at the time of power failure.

That is, FIG. 11-37 (1) shows a setting when the power is cut off in a state where the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state and there is no “setting value confirmation” operation (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). The control regarding the value is shown, and FIG. 11-37 (2) shows the control regarding the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of "determine the set value" in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state. Shown.

Further, FIGS. 11-37 (1) and 11-37 (2) show various situations in the work of changing the settings from the upper row to the lower row in the order of occurrence (see "Order" column and "Status" column). ). Further, in FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8) is shown in the "lock switch" column. In the "setting value" column, the setting value data (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. Further, in the "setting value display" column in the figure, the display contents (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. There is.

When the setting change work is performed, as shown at the top of the "Status" column in FIG. 11-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1), and the right side of the figure is on the right side. As shown in the column of "lock switch", the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is the ON state. Further, in FIG. 11-37 (1), the "set value" at the time of "power on" in order 1 is because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is "1". , "1".

Further, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the "set value display" column is blank at this stage because the power has just been turned on and the RAM 102 Since it is before the process (step S21TM1150) of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area is performed, it indicates that the display of the set value has not been started.

After the "power on" status, the "setting change mode start" status (order 2) is displayed. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON", and the "setting value" column is RAM 102. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of is not changed, and the "setting value display" column is the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the setting value read from and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

Subsequently, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON" and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. , As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the "setting value" column remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from "1" to "2", the column of "setting value display" (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is displayed. It changes to the new selected value "2".

Furthermore, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 4) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area. By changing the setting value stored in to "2" to "3", the "setting value display" column (setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. It changes to the new value "3".

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the power is cut off during "changing the set value" (order 5), the operation of fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored. Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) has not been executed, the "set value" column remains "1". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON and the power is turned on (order 6), then. In the "setting change mode start" situation (order 7), the setting value ("1" in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. , Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". The same applies when the order 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and when the power is cut off without completing the setting change operation (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value of the RAM 102 is set. Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is This is the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time (before the power is turned off). In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set.

Next, control when a power failure occurs after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power is cut off before the set value is confirmed will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is confirmed, the "set value is confirmed" shown in the order 5 is performed after the "setting value is being changed" shown in the order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1", and the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is "OFF" based on turning the lock switch 21TM051 into the OFF state.

That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180) in the setting change mode, the setting value "1" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes the setting information temporary storage area. It is overwritten by "3" which is a stored set value (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)), whereby the set value is fixed (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

Then, when the power is cut off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) is executed. The "set value" column is "3". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from when the power is turned on. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the subsequent “setting change mode start” status ( In order 8), the set value (“3” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is stored in the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The "set value" column is also "3", and the "set value display" column is also "3". The same applies when the order 8 is controlled not in the setting change mode but in the setting confirmation mode.

As described above, when the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. , The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, if a clerk at the amusement park mistakenly shifts the game machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further performs a setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, it is possible to stop the change of the set value and return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, handling of the set value in such an unstable state becomes a problem, but as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the power supply is performed without turning off the lock switch 21TM051. When a disconnection occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time the power is turned on, so that the set value can be set appropriately and the control regarding the set value is unstable. It is possible to avoid the change and execute appropriate control regarding the set value.

FIG. 11-38 shows the effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). (Image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) shows an example in which notification that an operation for changing a set value has been performed is executed.

FIG. 11-38 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, while executing the variable display of the special symbol) (game control). Step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game control), a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of game control timer interrupt process). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated The command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted in order to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and the setting change mode and Even though it is not controlled by any of the setting confirmation modes, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected" is executed.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 "detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch" as an abnormal operation warning notification based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display priority of the abnormal operation warning notification is higher than that of the background image and the decorative symbol (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol), the decoration is as shown in FIG. 11-38 (2). Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk of the amusement park, etc., has performed an operation to change the set value even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly grasp and confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. In addition, a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 May be notified that an operation for changing the set value has been detected by emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a red blinking mode).

In the present embodiment, the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt processing is executed). Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation for performing (the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within the period during which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated during the period when the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or during the period when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the set value is being changed illegally.

In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Notifies that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed in the image display device 5, which is the largest display device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and performs fraud. I try to deter it.

Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the game machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the game machine frame / door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and notifies that fact. Further, as described above, ball lending is suspended or suspended, and prize ball payout is also suspended or suspended. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is in an open state. Thereby, it is possible to see the back side surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch) on the back surface side thereof. Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position / Or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be able to be operated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is used regardless of whether or not the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. When it is operated, the deterrence of fraud is strengthened by notifying that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 11-39, the information output circuit 112 in the present embodiment is provided with 10 information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and signals corresponding to the respective information output terminals are output. Will be done.

In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds. A game machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame / door frame open signal is turned on when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It turns on even when it is.

A signal for the number of times all symbols are confirmed is output from the third terminal. The signal of the number of times all symbols are confirmed is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when confirmed), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. All start port signals are output from the fourth terminal. The all start port signals are pulse signals that are output when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening and are also output when a game ball is won in the second start winning opening. Yes, the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

One jackpot signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned on when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. Two jackpot signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is turned on when it is controlled in the jackpot game state, and is also turned on when it is controlled in the high base state. That is, the period during which the jackpot 1 signal is in the OFF state and the jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state can be specified as a high base state.

A setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time 10 out balls (game balls launched into the game area and guided to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. It is .1 second. A winning signal is output from the 9th terminal. The winning signal is sent every time a game ball wins a prize at each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). It is a pulsed signal that is output every time a prize is detected by the switch) and is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that turns on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won), it is judged as an abnormal prize. In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the game stop target error, and abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. ..

In this way, the security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the 7th terminal, so that the possibility of fraudulent activity can be notified to the outside. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same 7th terminal. Since the number of pulsed setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (1), when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 10th terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 11-40 (1). Similarly, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

If RAM clear is executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal will be ON for 30 seconds from the time the power is turned on, but the setting change compatible signal Is not turned on.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured so that the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not assumed and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The setting change compatible signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is parity in the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) based on the RAM clear being executed. Even after the check result is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side where the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is recognizable that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If it is recognizable by the device and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, it is possible for the management device to recognize that it may have been temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is input. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the game machine has executed on the external side depending on the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, the possibility that the RAM clear is executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be recognized separately.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. In this configuration, a security signal is output during the period controlled in the setting change mode, but no security signal is output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled in the setting change mode. Includes a configuration that does not output a security signal and does not output a security signal even during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is maintained in the OFF state based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

In this way, in a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (5). In the case of (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (the setting change corresponding signal is OFF state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting change mode. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. When the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is turned off, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is in the OFF state), when one signal is in the ON state, the other signal is in the OFF state. It becomes a relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. In addition to being recognizable, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (6), when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, the game is based on the fact that the detection of the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed with the closing of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. It may be difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to a signal that supports setting changes due to restrictions on the allocation of. In the example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2), an example in which a setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output is shown.

In the pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In the pattern 2, unlike the pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when it is controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that turns on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won), it is judged as an abnormal prize. In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the game stop target error, and abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of FIG. 11-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

By being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal in this way, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility of fraudulent activity, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. It is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the mode has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change may have been executed). In addition, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The signal output from the 10th terminal turns off 30 seconds after the end), and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change correspondence signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided on the game machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change corresponding signal in the management device. By displaying in association with the preset value determined in advance, it is possible to perform a process of displaying in a contrastable manner. As a result, the manager of the game store can easily manage the actual setting values of the plurality of game machines via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the settings changed in the setting change work. The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, it is possible to optimize the management of the settings of a plurality of game machines in the game store by confirming the settings of the game machine or changing the settings again. it can.

As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off when the setting change mode ends and the setting confirmation mode ends, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special mode. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as a signal corresponding to the setting change of the special mode. In this example, the same number of pulses as the number of set values are output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 seconds. For example, when the set value is 3, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is completed without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, but based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 1, the setting change corresponding signal of a special mode is used. 1 pulse is output as.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed). It is possible to notify the changed setting value) to the outside, and output a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value from a common information output terminal. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a setting change corresponding signal of the special mode at a predetermined predetermined trigger. To. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of prize balls paid out by 1000. At that time (predetermined event), triggered by an event related to the game machine error, such as the detection of the opening of the game machine frame 3, the detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3a, or the detection of a magnetic abnormality. (When it occurs), a signal corresponding to the setting change in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), one pulse is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

This makes it possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each game machine. For example, the external device is not properly input with the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined opportunity thereafter, and the prevention of fraud in which the set value is changed by an inappropriate method can be strengthened.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, as a result of changing the set value in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, and the setting change is supported based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 3. 3 pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), 3 pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was not changed. In some cases, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (2), an operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. There is. In this way, when the setting change mode is controlled, a common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. , Signal output processing can be simplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on because the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the set value is not changed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1 and is not changed. In this case, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and the setting change corresponding signal is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output as. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value of the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). It is possible to notify the outside of the setting value (the setting value stored in the area and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029), and the signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value. It is possible to output a signal notifying the above from a common information output terminal.

In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. , It turns off 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode). ) Setting change correspondence signal will be output.

(Modification example of game control main processing)
Next, other modes related to the game control main processing of FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44. 11-11 to 11-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and FIG. 11- As shown in 43 and FIGS. 11-44, the mode may be changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to the accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to the step S21TM2110 of FIG. 11-43 and clears input via the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

When the ON state is detected in the status check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 has the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. The RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and the initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). The series of processes associated with the initialization process (processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM141-10 and S21TM1460 shown in FIGS. 11-13, and description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processes after step S21TM2120. To do. The process shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1320 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG. 11-13, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power failure recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at the time of power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIGS. 11-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Step S21TM2320).

When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status. The processes shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 in FIG. 11-12, and the description thereof will be omitted. Then, after executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 confirms the setting so that the set value can be confirmed. The mode shifts to (step S21TM251-10 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The process shown in step S21TM251-10 to step S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the process shown in step S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, when it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is assumed that NO is determined in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIGS. 11-43, and the initialization process (step S21TM2220 or later) is performed. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the process of) is executed. As a result, it is determined as NO in step S21TM2320, and the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Is not controlled in the setting change mode.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, a series of processes related to steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in steps S21TM1470 to 1470 shown in FIGS. 11-13. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270) and then a setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at the time of power failure recovery or an initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step). S21TM2520) is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since it is possible to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended on the effect control CPU 120 side, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 and suppress the capacity for storing the number of commands.

(Another variant of the feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear), but the setting value is not limited to such a form. The switch for changing the above is provided on the main board 11 (the operation can be detected by the game control microcomputer 100), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). It may be. With such a configuration, the positions of the switch for switching the set value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) are compared with the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. When changing the set value, the confirmation of the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value become easy, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game information such as the base is displayed is shown. Not limited to such a form, a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total game status, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped individually and more clearly, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

Further, while the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is provided, the configuration may not include a switch for changing the set value. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when controlled in the setting change mode (for example,). Change every 5 seconds in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6), and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is stored in the setting value storage area (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be fixed by overwriting with the set value. The clerk at the amusement park switched the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed was displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and was displayed at that time. It is possible to determine the set value as the set value of the game machine.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of winning, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It may be an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium is enclosed in the gaming machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value. Information indicating that an operation for changing the above has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like may be included. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer so that the hall computer can specify that each game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ..

In the above embodiment, the period is controlled by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, the setting change mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special are based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. may be used to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode may be used. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (for example, 7). The segment display may emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode). Further, the pachinko game machine 1 is instructed to display the number of rounds during the big hit game (round number display) and to instruct the player to launch the game ball into a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, these indicators indicate that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. It may be made to emit light according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security is secured. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned off, but the setting change mode is not limited to this mode. Or, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. As a result, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By adopting such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. It becomes possible to identify to.

Regarding the expectation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is determined according to the set value of the game machine (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the jackpot expectation. The selection ratio of) may be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation is low, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, in the case of 5 or 6), the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, in the case of 5 or 6). It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2). With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expectation suggestion effect with 3 or more black stars is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. Further, even if the reach has a low jackpot expectation, the player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, it is possible to improve the interest even when the jackpot expectation is low.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined number of bets, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player to play the game. When a player stops a symbol in response to an operation of a stop button and the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big) Other inventions can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms of the feature 21TM]
Next, details regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 21TM and other forms will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The game machine frame includes a game machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the game machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each have a hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in the direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side to the outer frame is provided.

Further, the outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that serves as an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game machine frame 3 is a frame made of synthetic resin to which the game board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape in which the center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the game machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off from the game machine frame 3. The frame 3 for a game machine is a frame body in which speakers 8L, 8R, a game effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

When a clerk at the game hall performs maintenance on the surface of the game board (for example, measures to clear the ball clogging), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating it toward the front side like a door with the mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. In order for the clerk of the game hall to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the game machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can identify that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of identifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized separately.

(Processing when power is turned on)
12-1 and 12-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13, and FIG. This is a process corresponding to the process shown in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-43 to 11-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIG. 11-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 11-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 11-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting changing flag is set when the process shifts to the setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a regular value, for example, 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value different from the above regular value (for example, 0) is stored in the set value storage area. There may be. Also, if the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. , The initial value is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each total for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized. Note that the notification that the game state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM3045). The process proceeds to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. From the sensor 21TM300, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 12-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step). S21TM3030 YES), the game machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070), and the set value is changed and / or It becomes possible to confirm, and the process proceeds to the normal game process on condition that the game machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070). ..

In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to set the state (setting confirmation mode) in which the set value can be confirmed, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (1) 2) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, on the condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) in step S21TM3040 (3). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, it shifts to the normal game processing. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the normal game process. With the transition to the normal game processing, the processing corresponding to steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 11-13 or steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 11-44 can be executed, and FIG. 11-14 shows. The indicated game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process, etc. can be executed).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed. The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

Further, in step S21TM3030, if the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), the CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), The setting value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM3010), if the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area. , 0 is set as the setting value, and the setting value error error command is transmitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal (for example, displays a message "The set value is abnormal"). To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the set value should be changed (for example, displays a message "Please change the set value"). The speakers 8L and 8R may be used to notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, a voice saying "the set value is abnormal" is output), and the set value is changed. It is also possible to notify that the state should be (for example, output a voice saying "Please change the set value").

When the CPU 103 transmits the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. , The initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each of these set values is not cleared. The aggregated value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized.

Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 12-2. Move to. The backup command (step S21TM3045) at the time of power-off recovery and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) at the time of power-on are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it is possible to identify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , The command transmission flag may be cleared when the normal game processing is started (step S21TM1470 to). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on). If either YES is determined in step S21TM3020) or the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing, it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by clearing the RAM (step S21TM3150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to change the set value (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination processing of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is temporarily turned off and the next power is turned on (1) to (3). All the conditions of are satisfied, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command to notify the effect control CPU 120 that the power supply should be turned off. You may try to do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters "Please turn off the power") prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. .. Further, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12-2. In the process of FIG. 12-2, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may have been changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the CPU 103 is set to specify that the setting change mode has been controlled. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and moves to step S21TM3520. Transition.

Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag is flagged. Is still 0).

Further, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current set value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM3600). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). It is controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM3530, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO) in the process of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game process. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating the set value stored in the set value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and the power is cut off during the setting change. It is determined that there is no (NO in step S21TM3020) and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), and further, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). Since NO) and RAM clear (step S21TM3050) have not been executed, it is sufficient to execute the normal process at the time of power restoration, and both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. When it is confirmed that this (NO in step S21TM3060), the normal game processing may be started.

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that the RAM clear was executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. If the regular set value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area before (before it is determined as YES in step S21TM3530) (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0). (When the operation of changing the set value is not performed, etc.), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set value (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on processing again, and executes the processing after step S21TM3010.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control and initialize the game state and the like (execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, and RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

In the control shown in FIG. 12-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) while being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are in the closed state, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting for the open state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 operates a command for instructing the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a to be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 to confirm the setting change mode or the setting. A command instructing the user to notify that the mode should be terminated may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like notify that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 is pressed. Notify that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode should be terminated by operation. For example, the image display device 5 may display the message "Open the frame 3 for the game machine, set the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, and end the setting change mode."

Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21TM051 A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the operation (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (2) Clear switch) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is set based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Although it is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected" is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the normal game processing has started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 12-3 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When controlled to the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is used as shown in FIG. 12-3 (1). Is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

Every time the clerk of the amusement park operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the normal setting value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding to this. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area and prompt the setting change operation. If a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area and the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the manager of the amusement park May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. , We prevent such misunderstandings and make sure that the setting change operation is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area. , The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029, but after that, if the setting change operation is performed even once and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, then In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value during the period controlled by the setting change mode (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). This is done, and a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is not stored in the set value storage area, and information different from the regular value (character E in this example) is also stored in the display monitor 21TM029. ) Is not displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled in the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 Then, the regular setting value (2 in this example) stored in the setting value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular setting value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, if the setting value initially stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed thereafter. During the period controlled to the setting change mode (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the set value is updated within the range of the regular set value, and the set value storage area is the normal value. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information different from the regular value (character E in this example) is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

For example, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Therefore, after that, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the setting value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

In addition, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game field side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Ball lending restrictions based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, the ball lending restriction method when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-4. FIG. 12-4 shows the main board 11, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), and the card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIG. 12-4, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even in the state of being electrically connected to the 100), the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state during the period when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state.

As a result, the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, and while the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since the EXS signals are both OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, while the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. It is designed not to. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Then, the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be used. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3, and also does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is not possible to operate the pachinko machine 1 unless it is in the open state, the game machine frame 3 must be in the open state in order to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, the game machine frame 3 is usually open during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, the state of the gaming machine. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the game machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and judgment processing for that purpose are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes a computer.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is prevented from executing the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process are restricted during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. To. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized for ball lending processing and prize ball processing.

In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the payout control, such as the inability to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the maintenance work of the game machine when the door is opened.

(Resume ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-5. In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state during the payout of the game medium. , The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the suspended payout is resumed based on the fact that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (closed).

FIG. 12-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

During the period when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in a stopped state. That is, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in the period of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXE signal Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the game medium is not paid out.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (game machine frame 3 or the glass door). (When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state when the payout operation is possible.

Then, based on the fact that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the PRDY signal is turned ON), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the above, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the game medium interrupted by the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

Therefore, out of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power outage occurs (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is made. Since the payout is executed for the number of unpaid pieces that have not been paid out, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player.

(Ball lending process when power failure occurs (without shifting to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-6, the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is specified. To explain. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the fact that the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, and the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is restarted.

FIG. 12-6 shows the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the power-on processing is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processes after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 12-1 are executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in a stopped state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period during which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not set.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes able to detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually removes the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is set, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. ..

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the open states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the withdrawal of the suspended game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
FIG. 12-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is the game control microcomputer. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the clerk of the game hall initializes the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 by operating the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, and initializes the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both the RAM clear and the RAM clear will be executed.

Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, FIG. 12-7 (2). Will be specifically described with reference to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (2), when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Occasionally, the payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the payout is restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. do not do.

FIG. 12-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and , Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the power-on processing is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in a stopped state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out even if the unpaid number of data is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear process has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not set.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes able to detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the frame 3 for the game machine and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, so even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Is completed), and the PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has not detected any open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. And.

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is used. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 has not been cleared in the microcomputer 21TM370 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the data of the unpaid number is displayed. The payout operation is performed one by one until it becomes 0. As a result, the game medium has been interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the ball lending is completed. Is possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (2), when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. In the case), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining number to be paid out). Even when the PRDY signal is turned on (because there is no game medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid quantity stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized, so that the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed in (previous) (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number has not been paid out. No payouts will be made for the number of payouts.

Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the unpaid number of data stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is accompanied by the execution. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify the management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the number of unpaid numbers formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, since the unpaid number of data is cleared by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the number of unpaid items is not paid out during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

(Modified example of ball lending processing (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 12-8 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the above-mentioned clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with independent clear switches.

When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

When the game hall clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. 21TM052a is turned off. On the contrary, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized without initializing the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on to clear the game. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. Then, when the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on when the power is turned on. And.

Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, FIG. 12-8 (2). Will be specifically described with reference to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and the clear switch 21TM052a is set when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Occasionally, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished without restarting the payout. ..

FIG. 12-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the power-on processing is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in a stopped state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out even if the unpaid number of data is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clearing process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clearing has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not set.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes able to detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the frame 3 for the game machine and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, so even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the open states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). (Because of the existence of the medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on. , The payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid pieces becomes 0. As a result, the game medium has been interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the ball lending is completed. Is possible.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up in the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned ON because the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out). Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data is paid out. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is displayed in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid numbers will not be initialized and will be executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid games that have not been paid out , The payout will be executed.

Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the number of unpaid numbers stored in the RAM 21TM302 is not initialized, so that the ball can be rented. It is possible to appropriately protect the data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the number of unpaid numbers formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, after a period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the unpaid number of payouts is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Restriction on payout of prize balls based on detection of open state of frame for game machine or glass door frame)
Next, a method of restricting the payout of prize balls when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 12-9. FIG. 12-9 shows a game control microcomputer when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. FIG. 5 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process.

At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the game machine frame 3 is open (and the glass door frame 3a is open if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down and the upper plate on which the prize balls that have flowed down are stored are not physically connected, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it.

In the example of FIG. 12-9, the game control is performed when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of the game medium for any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. The prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

In this way, while the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game medium is the winning opening. Even if the winning is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control of the prize ball without driving the payout motor 21TM289. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be used. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3, and also does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Resume paying out prize balls after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the prize ball is being paid out, and then the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-10. In the example shown in FIG. 12-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state during the payout of the game medium. , The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the suspended payout is resumed based on the fact that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (closed).

As shown in FIG. 12-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. During the period when the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is paid out, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, and the game machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is used for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

As described above, during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Do not pay out game media. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (game machine frame 3 or the glass door). When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Based on the contents of the stored unpaid number storage buffer, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the game medium interrupted by the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (without shifting to setting change mode))
Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 12-11 is used. Will be explained concretely. In the example shown in FIG. 12-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the power failure occurring during the payout of the game medium, and the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. However, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is resumed.

As shown in FIG. 12-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period when the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the power-on processing is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processes after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 12-1 are executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process to be the power-on process (after the power is turned on, the serial is shown in FIG. 12-1 without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). During the communication circuit setting process (period until the execution of the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480)), since the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the payout of the game medium is maintained in the interrupted state.

As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 12-1 (step) During the period until S21TM1480) is executed), the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. Do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes able to detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually removes the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is set, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection that the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. The state is set and the payout of the game medium is not executed.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid pieces becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the payout of the prize ball.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 12-12 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 12-12, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

As shown in FIG. 12-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period when the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and , Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the power-on processing is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode), which is the process when the power is turned on, is controlled and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 12-1 (step S21TM1480). ) Is stopped, so that the payout of the game medium is interrupted even if the data of the number of unpaid numbers is not cleared. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear process has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes able to detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the frame 3 for the game machine and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, so even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later), the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state. In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection that the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. It becomes a state.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has not detected any open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Let me.

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is used. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 has not been cleared in the microcomputer 21TM370 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. As a result, the game medium has been interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration. , Setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed, and on condition that the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the prize ball is paid out. It is possible to complete.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). This is because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game medium to be paid out is (Because it does not exist), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid quantity stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized, so that the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing executed in (previous) (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number has not been paid out. No payouts will be made for the number of payouts.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, since the unpaid number of data is cleared by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the number of unpaid items is not paid out during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

(Modification example of prize ball processing (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 12-13 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and the clear switch 21TM052a is set when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 12-13, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without restarting the payout, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period when the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the power-on processing is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode), which is the process when the power is turned on, is controlled and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 12-1 (step S21TM1480). ) Is stopped, so that the payout of the game medium is interrupted even if the data of the number of unpaid numbers is not cleared. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clearing process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clearing has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes able to detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the frame 3 for the game machine and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, so even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on the above, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The sensor 21TM300 starts driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected in the open state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). (Because there is a medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one piece until the unpaid number data becomes 0. The payout operation is performed one by one. As a result, the game medium has been interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration. , Setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed, and on condition that the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the prize ball is paid out. It is possible to complete.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. Does not work.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data is paid out. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is displayed in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid numbers will not be initialized and will be executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode due to power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid games that have not been paid out , The payout will be executed.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, after a period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the unpaid number of payouts is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball number command is not sent. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is no longer received, so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and signal corresponding to setting change)
As described above, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. With this security signal, as described above, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of fraudulent activity, the detection of the game stop target error, and the like have been performed. Further, for the security signal, from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, FIGS. 12-1 and 12-1 and FIG. It is turned on during the period from step S21TM3510 shown in 12-2 until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed).

Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal starts from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIGS. It is turned on during the period from step S21TM3510 shown in 12-2 until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game processing is executed). By this setting change correspondence signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed (the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting value is executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when shifting to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is once turned off, and then from the same 7th terminal, the RAM 102 Since the number of pulsed setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 12-1) when the power is turned on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the normal game processing is started. In addition, with the end of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms have passed since the setting change mode ended and the normal game processing was started), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 2, a pulse of 2 is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special aspect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (2), although the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 12-1) was executed when the power was turned on, the mode did not shift to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured so that the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not assumed and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIGS. 12-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. (To be exact, 50 ms has passed since the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode was completed and the normal game processing was started). The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but as shown in FIG. 12-15 (3), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed. Does not turn off immediately after the setting change mode ends, and continues to be on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, the OFF state is set (at the timing when 50 ms have elapsed since the transition to the normal game processing).

Further, in any of FIGS. 12-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change). The setting value of the RAM 102 is stored after 50 ms has elapsed from the end of the mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, after 50 ms or more have elapsed). Based on the setting value stored in the area being 2, 2 pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special aspect. As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the setting change mode is not entered, the security signal is sent when the power is turned on (RAM). It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds from the time of clear execution).

Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. It is recognizable that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, it is highly possible that the mode has changed to the setting change mode accompanied by clearing the RAM. If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed and the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that (there is a possibility that only confirmation was performed without making the set value changeable).

That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may have been executed, but the setting change mode may not have been entered. If it is recognizable by the management device of the above and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible that the setting confirmation mode is entered without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that (there is a possibility that only confirmation was performed without changing the set value) and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds. , The management device can recognize that there is a possibility of shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, there is a high possibility of shifting to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear). In this way, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the game machine has executed on the external side depending on the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

Therefore, even if the external device is configured so that the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not assumed and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled can be recognized separately.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so that RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about 30 seconds + the period controlled by the setting change mode. On the other hand, when the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is in the 0 state (YES in step S21TM3570) when the power is turned on. The RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode (more accurately, the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

In this way, the security signal output period differs between the case where the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode and the case where the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, so that each game machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish whether it is controlled by the mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished (to be exact, the setting change mode). Alternatively, the OFF state is set (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. In addition, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds longer than the input period of the signal corresponding to the setting change, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and the RAM has been cleared accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without clearing the RAM.

In this way, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from different output terminals, and on the external device side to which these signals are input, a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) is performed in the game machine. It is possible to distinguish between the occurrence of the above and the fact that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be specified based on the input period of the security signal.

Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the setting was confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off within 50 ms after the mode is entered and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started, even if the setting confirmation mode ends (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off) and the normal game processing is started, the period is at least 50 ms or more. The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

If the period during which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are ON is less than the predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as the hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been changed. By turning on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode as in the present embodiment. On the external device side, it is possible to recognize that each pachinko gaming machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Regarding the setting change compatible signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change compatible signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine is output on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the game machine 1 can be specified and managed. Assuming that the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after being turned on, and then the set value is set. When the configuration is such that the number of pulses with a width of 100 ms corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms). The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneous by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) that cannot be recognized and is output after that. There is a risk of recognizing it. Regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode as in the present embodiment, at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on to the external device side. Then, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

FIG. 12-16 is a diagram showing another example of the effect device included in the effect control board 12. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, the lamp control board 14 has the game effect lamp 9, the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101, the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102, and the fourth symbol indicator. The 21TM103 and the setting change status indicator 21TM104 are connected, and both of them are composed of a light emitting device such as an LED. Further, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common light emitting color.

The off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 has a change in the first reserved storage number, that is, when a prize is generated in the first start winning opening (when the first reserved storage number increases), and the first special symbol. When the display result is confirmed after the variable display of the above is completed (when the first reserved storage number decreases), the first reserved storage number for which the updated first reserved storage number is specified from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first hold storage number designated by the first hold storage number designation command.

For example, when the first hold storage number specified by the first hold storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. When the number of first reserved storages specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the number of first reserved storages specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is set to the blinking state and the other light emitting device is set to the lighting state. Then, when the first hold storage number specified by the first hold storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

The off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 has a change in the second reserved storage number, that is, when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening (when the second reserved storage number increases), and a second special symbol. When the display result is confirmed after the variable display of the above is completed (when the second reserved storage number decreases), the second reserved storage number for which the updated second reserved storage number is specified from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second hold storage number designated by the second hold storage number designation command.

For example, when the number of second reserved storages specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. When the number of second reserved storages specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the number of second reserved storages specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is set to the blinking state and the other light emitting device is set to the lighting state. Then, when the second reserved storage number specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

The fourth symbol display 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started (that is,). (Variation display) is started, and when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the light is turned off or turned on (that is, the variation display is completed), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks (that is, changes) at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started. (Display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the light-off state or the lighting state is set (that is, the variation display ends), and the display result is derived.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a first hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the first hold storage number has been subtracted when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a display result designation that specifies a display result. The variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the reception of a set of commands, a command and a variation pattern command for specifying the variation time of the special symbol, from the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the first special symbol is used. It is possible to identify that the variable display of is completed and the display result is derived.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is confirmed) according to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command. ). For example, when the display result of "missing" was specified by the display result specification command, one of the light emitting devices was turned off during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result of "big hit" was specified by the display result specification command. In that case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on during the symbol determination period.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a second hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the second hold storage number has been subtracted when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a display result designation that specifies the display result. The second special symbol variation display is executed based on the reception of a set of commands, a command and a variation pattern command for specifying the variation time of the special symbol, from the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the second special symbol is used. It is possible to identify that the variable display of is completed and the display result is derived.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is confirmed) according to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command. ). For example, when the display result of "off" was specified by the display result specification command, the other light emitting device was turned off during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result of "big hit" was specified by the display result specification command. In that case, the other light emitting device is turned on during the symbol determination period.

The emission color of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 and the emission color of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 may be different. For example, the former may be emitted in blue and the latter may be emitted in red. You may let it. Further, in the fourth symbol display 21TM103, the emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A and the emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B are made different. For example, the former may be made to emit blue light (the same emission color as the off-screen first hold display 21TM101), and the latter may be emitted in red (the same emission color as the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102). You may do so.

Further, an image showing the first reserved storage number (for example, an image showing the blue number "0-4") and an image showing the second reserved storage number (for example, an image showing the red number "0-4") are displayed as images. It may be displayed on the display device 5. In addition, when the image of the 4th symbol corresponding to the 1st special symbol (for example, it is a square image and the 1st special symbol is fluctuating and blinking (fluctuating) in white during the period when the 1st special symbol is fluctuating and displayed) Is an image that is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and if the display result is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol confirmation period) and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square). The image is blinking (fluctuating) in yellow during the period when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and if the display result is off, it is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result is a big hit. In that case, the image (the image stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change status at the timing when it receives the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled. Turn on the device 21TM104. Then, when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

The effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The status indicator 21TM104 is blinked. Then, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off at the timing when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed. To do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is controlled to the setting change mode (lighting state) and the setting confirmation mode (blinking state) according to the light emitting mode of the setting change status indicator 21TM104. It has become. Here, as compared with the period from when the power is turned on until the image display control in the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123, the lamp control board 14 emits light from each light emitting device after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, the period during which it is not possible to notify that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (image by the display control unit 123). Even during the period before display control becomes possible), it is possible to notify that the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode according to the light emitting mode of the setting change status display 21TM104. It will be possible.

On the effect control board 12 side, not only the setting change status display 21TM104 but also the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. By emitting light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern at the time of operation, it may be notified that the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. For example, the setting change mode is controlled by turning on all the LEDs constituting the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. The LED that constitutes the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 is all controlled to the setting confirmation mode by blinking. May be notified.

On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 performs the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20 are made to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (for example, all are turned on at the same time). ), It is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled. Further, during the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 performs the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second. The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display 20 are made to emit light with a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (and a light emission pattern different from that when the setting change mode is controlled). (For example, by making all blink at the same time), it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

[Explanation of feature 30TM]
Next, the feature unit 30TM will be described. FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying the first hold storage number (0-4 first hold display 30TM001) and the second hold storage number (0-4 second hold) are displayed. A second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display are provided. The first reserved display area 30TM101, the second reserved display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen, and the active display area 30TM103 is in the center and the left side when viewed from the player is the first reserved display area 30TM101. The right side is the second hold display area 30TM102.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the first hold storage number in the first hold display area 30TM101. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

Further, when the second hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second hold display 30TM002 in the second hold display area 30TM102 in a number corresponding to the second hold storage number. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, although the start condition (for example, winning the second start winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the second special symbol for which the second special symbol (and the number of stored storages of the second is not 0) is not established. When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 corresponds to the order closer to the active display area 30TM103 (from the left when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 is a big hit game because the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

Further, in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side when viewed from the player), an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and the first hold storage number (sub-hold display 30TM004 of 0 to 4) is displayed. The sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and the sub-active display area 30TM105 which is different from the active display area 30TM103 and displays the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are provided.

In the present embodiment, based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display 30TM004 at the time of start winning (when a prize is generated in the first start winning opening), the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is designated. The sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the number of 1-hold storage is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, in the sub-hold display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0) is not established. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is controlled to the jackpot game state because the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed in the order closer to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (from the right when viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

Here, as shown in FIG. 13-1, the sub-hold display 30TM004 has a star-shaped contour, which is different from the first hold display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is smaller than that of the first hold display 30TM001, it is inconspicuous and the visibility is low for the player. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped contour, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-active display 30TM005 is smaller than that of the active display 30TM003, it is inconspicuous and the visibility is low for the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-1, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the sub-active is displayed in response to the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being executed in the image display device 5. The sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. As described above, as the information corresponding to the variable display (common variable display) of 1 being executed, the information of different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the common variable display are displayed on the screen at the same time.

Further, corresponding to the first hold storage number being 4, four first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, and four sub hold displays are displayed in the sub hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed yet, information in different modes such as the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the first hold display 30TM001 of 1 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 of 1 corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 and the common variable display (hold memory) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common change display (variation display of the first special symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. It is possible to diversify the production using the hold display and improve the interest. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the running variation display (variation display of the first special symbol, variation display of the decorative symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production using the active display and improve the interest.

Here, as will be described later, when it is decided not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the determination at the time of starting winning, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, while the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. Further, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the subactive display 30TM005 is not displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105, further indicating that the subactive display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. The information (square frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 13-1) will not be displayed either.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect is a special mode in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white round display). (White triangle display in this example), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) (Display) or a notice effect to be displayed in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round display). Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white star-shaped display) of the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. It is a notice effect to be displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star shape display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star shape display).

FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not a new command (1) reserved memory number addition designation command) has been received (step S30TM1010).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning judgment results and the judgment result of the type of big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and specifies the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and first hold storage number addition designation commands) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. To do. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set at least based on the determination that the first change effect is executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It is determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 13-3) (step S30TM1030).

By executing the processes of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processes after step S30TM1030 are executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, it is configured so that the second change effect can be executed.

FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a "normal mode", a "special mode", a "blue mode", a "green mode", and a "red mode". , And any of the "golden modes" can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is "no display", "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". It is possible to determine any of the above, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Of these, "no display" means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white circle display) at a rate of 4%. (Triangle display), 18% of the blue mode (blue circle display), 21% of the green mode (green circle display), and 16% of the red mode (red circle display). ), And it becomes a golden mode (golden circle display) at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69. It will be executed at a rate of%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20%. A 25% proportion is red and a 35% proportion is golden. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than that when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), with respect to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. ..

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. May be. Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when it is displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as or higher than that before the active shift. It is supposed to change to. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the ratio of selecting the special mode as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio of selecting the other modes. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, which will be described later, the proportion of the change pattern of the hold display including the special aspect is not so low as compared with the proportion of the other aspects. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the display mode changes at a higher rate than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit as compared with the case where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher degree of expectation. It can be expected to change to the display mode (blue mode, red mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70%, but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The ratio of the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) being displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio that the final display mode is the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 1%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting prize is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 5%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40%, but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The ratio of the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) being displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio of the final display mode to the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 25%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting prize is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 50%.

In this way, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than that when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), with respect to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode becomes a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub hold display 30TM004 prior to the sub active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when it is displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as before the active shift, or a display with a higher degree of expectation. It is designed to change in mode. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the degree of expectation of a big hit is in the relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is different from the normal mode), and the second It may be decided to execute the change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is decided to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided (as an aspect).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a normal mode), and executes the second change effect (sub-hold display 30TM004 and). It may be determined that the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute (4-1) the first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided (as an aspect).

When the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute either the first change effect or the second change effect in the process of step S30TM1030 (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and ( If any of 4-2) is applicable, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold storage) is displayed in the normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started, this The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the above does not change from the normal mode to the other mode (change patterns 101, 201, when the final display mode is the "normal mode" shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5. (See 301, 401).

In the case of the above (4-2), the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 13-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (1), (2-1) and (2). -2) and (3) are applicable, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

When it is decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, when the above (1) is applicable, in step S30TM1060, the first updated first. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of hold storages (the first number of hold storages after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 (. (See FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5), the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command), and the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode of (see FIG. 13-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 executes the first change effect and decides not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, in the above (2-1) and (2-2). If any of the above applies, in step S30TM1120, the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final determined active display 30TM003. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5). If the above (2-2) is applicable, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 13-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the second change effect without executing the first change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, when the above (3) is applicable, the step In S30TM1210, the second is based on the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 13-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3)). If this is the case), a look-ahead counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). When neither the first change effect nor the second change effect notice effect is executed, but the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed ((4-2) above). Also (if applicable), set the look-ahead counter.

The read-ahead counter is set with a value corresponding to the first hold storage number updated based on the start winning prize (value specified by the first hold storage number specification command), and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the look-ahead counter is decremented by 1 each time (every time the first hold storage number subtraction specification command is received). That is, the value of the look-ahead counter is subtracted each time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variation display (or the second change effect is not executed but the sub-hold display 30TM004) that is the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect is displayed. Variable display) will be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag when it is determined to execute the first change effect (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold memory) by determining YES in step S30TM1020 described above. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning prize (new first hold memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display targeted for the first change effect ends.

13-4 and 13-5 are explanatory views showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the first change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the nth first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (timing at the time of start winning), (ii) The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side) in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (Timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning is displayed). ), The display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, what kind of display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. It indicates whether the display mode is adopted. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white round display is displayed, and "special" indicates a special mode in which a white triangular display is displayed. "Blue" indicates a blue aspect which is a blue round display, and "red" indicates a red aspect which is a red round display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 13-4 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 101 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of starting winning). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 103 is This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 does not change in the special mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 105 is a change pattern 105. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the blue mode after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). In the case of and 404), the active display 30TM003 remains in the blue mode and does not change after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively.

Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the green mode after the active shift. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the green mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will finally change from the special mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

Here, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the golden mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will finally change from the special mode to the golden mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the golden mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is displayed at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 will finally change from the red mode to the golden mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 13-4 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 201 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 201 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be notified in the normal mode even at the timing.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 204 is a notice target at the time of starting prize. After displaying the first hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is special even at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. The change pattern 205 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a blue mode, and the change pattern 206 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the target in the special mode, and the change pattern 207 is the first of the notice targets at the start winning. 1 After displaying the hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and in the change pattern 208, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 203, change pattern 204, change pattern 205, change pattern 206, change pattern 207, change pattern 208, change pattern 209, change pattern 210, change pattern 211, and change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode, and the change pattern 210 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the target in the blue mode, and the change pattern 211 is the first of the notice targets at the time of starting winning. 1 After displaying the hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 212 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 203, change pattern 204, change pattern 205, change pattern 206, change pattern 207, change pattern 208, change pattern 209, change pattern 210, change pattern 211, and change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 13-5 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 301 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 301 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second time. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the 302. The change pattern 302 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. The change pattern 303 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of, but changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 304 is at the time of starting winning. After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to the blue mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 305 changes the first hold display of the notice target to blue when the start prize is won. After displaying in the mode, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. The change pattern 306 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 307 is the notice target at the time of starting winning. After displaying the first hold display in blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 308 changes the first hold display of the notice target at the start winning. After displaying in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift without changing the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 309 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, and the timing of the active shift. However, it is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode, and the change pattern 310 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed even at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the red mode.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit) Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 13-5 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 401 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 401 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second time. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, even at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be announced in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of 402. The change pattern 402 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice target is also at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the above in a special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively. The change pattern 403 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display to be notified is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift. 1 The hold display is not changed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is not changed even at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405 to the change pattern 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, but the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 is a change pattern 406 that displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the first hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing it as it is, and the change pattern 407 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 408 is a notice at the start winning. After displaying the target first hold display in blue mode, the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the notice is given at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the target to the red mode, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the red mode, and the change pattern 410 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the start winning, and then the first hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The display changes in blue mode Instead, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode even at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 411 changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the start winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice target at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be notified in the red mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the hold display is displayed in the red mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 403, change pattern 404, change pattern 405, change pattern 406, change pattern 407, change pattern 408, change pattern 409, change pattern 410, change pattern 411, and change pattern 412, respectively. ing.

FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and it is decided to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, (i ) The 1st to nth sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the first hold storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is sub. The timing displayed in the active display area 30TM105 (timing at the time of starting prize), (ii) the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning is in a higher position in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (secondary active display area 30TM105). Timing to shift to (side) (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing to shift the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (sub-active display corresponding to the start winning) At the timing (timing when 30TM005 is displayed), the display information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIG. 13-6, what kind of display mode the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display becomes at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 13-6, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white star is displayed, and "blue" indicates a blue mode in which a blue star is displayed. "Red" indicates a red aspect that is a red star-shaped display.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 13-6 (A) when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is "1". Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 601 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIG. 13-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the fluctuation that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning). The sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are set according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 603 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, change patterns 902). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are set according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 605 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, and change patterns 902). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708 described later, change patterns 805 to 808, change patterns 906). In the case of ~ 912), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 701 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 701 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and also at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, and the change pattern 701 are used according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode, and the change pattern 703 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display to the blue mode and does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 704 is a change pattern 704 that changes the sub-hold display to be notified to the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift after displaying with.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, and the change pattern 701 are used according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change pattern 705 to the change pattern 708, respectively. In the change pattern 705, after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the above to a red mode, and the change pattern 706 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 707 is the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. After the display, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. 708 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. ..

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 13-6 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 801 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 801 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the advance notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 802 to change patterns 804. The change pattern 802 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 803 is the notice target at the start winning. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern 802 are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode and changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 806 is the sub-hold display of the notice target at the time of starting winning. Is displayed in the blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift without changing the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 807 is the first time after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the start winning. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the hold shift and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The pattern 808 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 13-6 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 901 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the sub-hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 902 to change patterns 905. The change pattern 902 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the third time. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the display to the blue mode and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 904 is the notice target at the time of starting winning. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display to be announced is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is set at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the above in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is the first, second, and third hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing and the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), And, the determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 906 to the change pattern 912. The change pattern 906 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, but at the timing of the third hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and the active shift It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 908 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice target is changed at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display in the red mode, and the change pattern 909 is a notice target at the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The sub-hold display of is not changed in the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 910 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. Instead, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 911 is a pattern, in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in blue at the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in red at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes to the mode and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 912 is the notice target at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be announced is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display is displayed in the red mode.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the rate at which the first change effect of displaying the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect is executed, in which is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-3, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

In this way, at the lower part of the screen, the player performs the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003, which has high visibility, at a high frequency. Can sustain your interest. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, which have low visibility, the percentage of big hits differs depending on whether or not they are displayed at the top of the screen. Attention will be paid to whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Further, since the jackpot expectation when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, whether or not the display mode changes when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Will also pay attention to.

Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the lower part of the screen and a star-shaped icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive) displayed at the upper part of the screen. The size and shape are different from the display 30TM005). That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed as a circle, and the other icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive display 30TM005) is displayed as a star. By doing so, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily grasp the difference (different types of display information). In addition, it is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production by the icon corresponding to the variable display.

Further, a common display color corresponding to a common variable display, such as the relationship between the first hold display 30TM001 in the red mode displayed at the bottom of the screen and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red mode displayed at the top of the screen. Icons (however, the shapes are different for round and star) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variable display.

In addition, a common display color icon corresponding to the variable display during execution, such as the relationship between the red-shaped active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-shaped subactive display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen. (However, icons with different shapes for round and star) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 to 13-6, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, the red aspect). The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red mode has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both hold display modes and displays the hold display. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red mode. The combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both active display modes and enhances the interest of the production that changes the display mode of the active display. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the first change effect is displayed. (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited during the active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited at the time of active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-3, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is provided with more display modes than the subactive display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 to 13-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is when changing the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. There are more than the change patterns of. In this way, by differentiating the types and patterns of the effects that can be executed according to the visibility of the active display and the hold display, the first change effect and the second change effect and the second effect are prevented from becoming excessively complicated. We are trying to appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-7 to 13-9. FIG. 13-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of execution.

First, FIG. 13-8 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-7 by displaying the variation of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-7), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the subactive display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the subactive display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect, and also displays the subactive display 30TM005. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the first hold storage number being 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (T2) and 13-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is set after the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 which is the target of the second change effect is displayed. From), the period until the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is completed (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 13-7).

As a result, if a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, special aspect, blue aspect, or red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start prize is awarded. The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, if a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-7). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is erased. The sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-7). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to a special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (5), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1. The sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-7). Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display), and the first hold display is changed based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (7), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) and the blue mode are displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display)) is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-7). Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c, which is a red round display), and the change pattern 906 of the second change effect is used. The sub-hold display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (9), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004c in red mode (red star-shaped display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is changed to the sub-active display area 30TM105. The shift display is performed, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Then, after the variation display targeted by the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted by the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 13-7, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103. The change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13-16. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

If the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period shown in T7 to T8 of FIG. 13-7. Change to mode. For example, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 determined at the time of starting winning is the red mode and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the blue mode immediately after the shift display, the variation display of the advance notice target is displayed. The subactive display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 13-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from being lowered and the interest being lowered. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variation display of the notice target is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 13-7).

As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which share at least a part of the display area with the area where the reach effect is executed, are hidden. On the other hand, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display, which are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, can be continuously displayed at the upper part of the screen even during the period when the reach effect is executed. , The player can see these. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of reserved memories even during the execution period of the reach effect, and can grasp the display modes of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-10 to 13-12. 13-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 13-11 and 13-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production image.

First, FIG. 13-11 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-10 when the first reserved storage number was 3 and the image display device 5 displayed the variation of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-10), a new prize is won while the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (gold mode in this example). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is not executed). Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. Also, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in FIGS. 13-10 (T2) and 13-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is from the time when the first hold display 30TM001, which is the target of the first change effect, is displayed until the end of the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001. The period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 13-10) is used.

As a result, if a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, special aspect, blue aspect, or red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start prize is awarded. The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, if a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 is subject to advance notice by the first change effect. It is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-10). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the next variation display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to a special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (5), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-10). The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device. At 5, the next variation display is started.

Here, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (6), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started (the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (7), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-10). The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device. At 5, the next variation display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c, which is a red round display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (9), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the following fluctuations are made in the image display device 5. Start displaying.

Then, after the variation display targeted by the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted by the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 13-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 13-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variation display of the notice target is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 13-10).

As shown above, if it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of the start prize, a new start prize will be awarded until the variation display that is the target of the first change effect is completed. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start prize is not executed either. In this way, after the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is once changed in the first hold display area 30TM101 with high visibility (after the mode is changed from the normal mode), a new start winning prize is subsequently generated. Even in this case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start prize in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is made to pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility. It is designed to prevent complication of the effect due to the execution of the second change effect for the variation display different from the variation display that is the target of the change effect.

In the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. An example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is the normal mode). If a new start prize is generated during the period (displayed in a different manner), the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but at that time. The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

In addition, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), other notices are not limited to the second change effect. The execution of the production may be restricted. For example, the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 each time the variable display is executed (for example, the first reserved storage number is changed from 3 to 0). It is possible not to execute the countdown effect (displayed as "3", "2", "1", "0" by subtracting 1 by 1). In addition, the background change effect that changes the background image to a special mode may not be executed until the variation display based on the new start winning prize is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. An example is shown in which execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is prohibited, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is usually used). If a new start prize occurs during the period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize is feasible, but corresponds to the new start prize. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 itself corresponding to the new start prize is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is displayed, but the display mode is usually displayed. It may not be changed as it is).

(Modification example related to the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. However, not limited to such a form, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect that acts on the first hold display 30TM001, and acts on the sub-hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

13-13, 13-14, and 13-15 are specific examples in the case where the first holding action effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-holding action effect is executed in the second change effect.

First, FIG. 13-13 (1) shows a state in which the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (2), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, a new start winning is generated for the winning ball device 6A. It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the subactive display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the subactive display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect, and also displays the subactive display 30TM005. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the first hold storage number being 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a), which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 13-13 (4), the character A appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 specializes the first hold display to be notified from the normal mode in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode is changed (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (6), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. While erasing the active display 30TM005, the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 one by one. Then, the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from the special mode to the blue mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b), which is a blue round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-hold display of the advance notice target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect during the execution of the variation display. Then, it is recognized that the display is changed to the sub-hold display 30TM004b), which is a blue star-shaped display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 13-13 (7), the character B appears, and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001a to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be notified in blue from a special aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect B). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (9), the character a appears, and an effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified is executed. As shown in FIGS. 13-14 (10) and 13-15 (11), the balloon that the character a flew flies toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (11) and 13-14 (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image of the balloon being broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (13) and 13-14, the effect control CPU 120 normally displays the sub-hold display to be notified in response to the execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect a). To the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (15), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. While erasing the active display 30TM005, the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode (white star-shaped display) and the sub-hold display 30TM004b in the blue mode (blue star-shaped display)). )) Are shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode during the execution of the variation display. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c), which is a red round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect while the variation display is being executed. Then, it is recognized that the display is changed to the sub-hold display 30TM004c), which is a red star-shaped display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (17), the character C appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first hold display 30TM001b to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first hold display 30TM001b to be announced, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be notified in red from the blue aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect C). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c, which is a red round display) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (19), the character b appears, and an effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified is executed. As shown in FIGS. 13-15 (20) and 13-15 (21), the balloons blown by the character b fly toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified and reach the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (21) and 13-15 (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image of the balloon being broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (23) and 13-15 (24), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in blue in response to the execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect b). To red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). ..

As described above, the effect mode is different between the first hold action effect executed when the mode of the first hold display is changed and the sub hold action effect executed when the mode of the sub hold display is changed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the existence of a plurality of types of hold-compatible displays (first hold display and sub-hold display).

As shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-15, the effect of the character appearing and taking an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed in response to the execution of the active action effect in which the character A appears and throws a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The aspect may be changed from the normal aspect to another aspect (special aspect, blue aspect, green aspect, red aspect, gold aspect). Further, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect is executed in response to the appearance of the character a and the action of flying a balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, there are a plurality of types due to the difference in the effect mode between the active action effect executed when the mode of the active display is changed and the sub-active action effect executed when the mode of the sub-active display is changed. It is possible to further improve the interest due to the existence of the variable display (active display and sub-active display).

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution rate of the second change effect may be different depending on the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the ratio of the first hold display 30TM001 being displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). Further, the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 itself displayed) may be high. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger (for example, 3 times) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). ) The rate at which the change pattern is selected is high, and the rate at which the change pattern with a large number of changes in the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, twice) is selected may be high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when a start winning prize occurs, but as described above, the display mode of the active display at the time of active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect that suggests that there is a possibility of change. This change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed.

The effect control CPU 120 is different from the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift and the final display mode of the active display determined when the start winning is generated when the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display is performed. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during the execution of the variation display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variation display.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode when the variable display is started. FIG. 13-16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "○" in FIG. 13-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

When the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is two, of which one is a success mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 011, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode.

When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The change suggestion effect is executed three times in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013, of which the success mode is two times and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 012, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 014, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode. It is a change pattern, and the change pattern 015 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then changes the change suggestion effect of the success mode. To change the active display to the blue mode, then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display unchanged in the blue mode, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the active display. Is a change pattern that changes to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 016, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, a change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode. The change pattern 017 is a change suggestion effect of the success mode after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift. To change the active display to a special mode, then execute the success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to blue mode, and then execute the success mode change suggestion effect to make the active display green. A change pattern in which the mode is changed, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode. Is.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is 5, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 018, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is a special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 13-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the blue mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 021, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 021, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is three, of which the success mode is two times and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that changes the display to the green mode and then executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display in the green mode, and the change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to not change the active display in the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern, in which the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. Is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to perform the active display. Is a change pattern that changes the color to red.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is 4, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. A change that changes the display to a green mode, then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a red mode, and then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a gold mode. It is a pattern.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode as shown in FIG. 13-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 13-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the green mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 031, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is three, of which the success mode is two times and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a red mode.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a 100% probability. The number of times the change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern 034 is 3, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode as shown in FIG. 13-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 13-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed once in the change pattern 041, of which the success mode is 1 time and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in the red mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

As shown in FIGS. 13-16, within one variation display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach is reached after the variation display is started. The more change suggestion effects are executed (within the period until the state is established), and in particular, the more success mode change suggestion effects are executed, the more the display color changes to a high hit expectation. The ratio increases.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the nth change suggestion effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode up to that point, the higher the ratio of the n + 1th change suggestion effect being executed. It is configured as follows. For example, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed (when n = 2), if both times are successful, the third change suggestion effect is always executed. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n = 3 and the case of n = 4. In this way, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the period from the start of the variation display to the establishment of the reach state, the same variation. Since the ratio of the next change suggestion effect being executed within the display period (the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state) is high, the player can execute the change suggestion effect the number of times, especially the success mode. It will be possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] within one variation display period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The rate of change to a high-degree display mode is high. Specifically, [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In the case, it is 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, it is 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, it is 4/5, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If it becomes, it is 5/5. In this way, the larger the [number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed], the higher the rate at which the active display changes to the display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. Also pays attention to the relationship between the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, which can improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the more times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to the display mode with high expectation of big hit. Specifically, the number of continuous change suggestion effects of the success mode is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and when the final display mode is the green mode. It is 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed, and how many times in succession.

Further, in this example, when the final display mode is the same display color, it is easy to select a change pattern in which the number of continuous change suggestion effects of the success mode is larger. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the change pattern 012 (2 consecutive) is selected more frequently than the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (2 consecutive). The rate of selection of 014 (3 consecutive) is higher, and in the case of the red aspect, the rate of selection of change pattern 016 (4 consecutive) is higher than that of change pattern 017 (3 consecutive). In this way, even if the display color is finally the same, the player's expectation can be further increased by making it easy for the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be continuous.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect based on the change pattern shown in FIGS. 13-16 determined at the time of winning the start. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether each change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. The types of change suggestion effects include change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character. There is a change suggestion effect E, in which E appears.

The effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 13-17 when the change suggestion effect executed the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect executed the n + 1th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning [ Select the table of "Success mode, next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, next effect execution is performed], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 13-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect executed at the n + 1th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning. Select the table of "Success mode, no next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 13-17 when the nth change suggestion effect is a failure mode and the n + 1th change suggestion effect is executed. Select the table of [Failure mode, next production execution]. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, next effect execution], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 13-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the change suggestion effect is not executed at the n + 1th time. Select the table of [Failure mode, no next production execution]. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, no next effect execution], character A is 35%, character B is 30%, character C is 30%, character D is 5%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 13-17. Therefore, when the nth and n + 1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E are selected in the n + 1th change suggestion effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1 There is a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the same character A appears at the nth time is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of becoming a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of becoming a successful mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a 100% probability of being a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In that case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the change suggestion effect this time is the last).

In this way, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high expectation for big hits differs depending on the type of character appearing in the production, so the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be done. In addition, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

In addition to the effect type shown in FIGS. 13-17, for example, an effect type may be provided in which the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is low and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also low. An effect type may be provided in which the display mode of the display changes at a high rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18 to 13-20. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 13-18, 13-19 (9) to (12), and 13-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the gold mode when the start prize is won. This is an example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 018. .. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the final display mode in green when the start prize is won. An example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. Is.

In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and based on the execution of the second change suggestion effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of the above, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect D of the success mode based on the decision and the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect, and the character E appears for the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it has been decided to execute the change suggestion effect E.

In FIG. 13-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes a variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. Indicates the state of

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect A of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (1), a character A appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, followed by FIG. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (3), the active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) of a special aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect B of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, followed by FIG. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character B hits the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (6), the active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in the blue mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect C of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (7), a character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 13-18 (8), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003b in the blue aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (9), the active display 30TM003d (green circle display) in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect. Green.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, and then, As shown in FIG. 13-19 (11), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (12), the active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect E of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the range of the crack is expanded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (15), an image (screen crack image 30TM210) in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image is displayed in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (16), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003c in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (17), the active display 30TM003e (golden circle display) in the golden mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fifth change suggestion effect. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (18), the screen crack image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 13-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. A reach state is established in which the same decorative symbol ("7" in this example) is stopped in the display area, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). The production is executed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the active display 30TM003e in the gold mode is hidden, and the square frame showing the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information will not be displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to the green mode when the start prize is won. This is an example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. ..

In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and based on the execution of the second change suggestion effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of the above, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that the decision is made and that the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode is executed based on the fact that the fifth change suggestion effect is not executed.

The effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) to 13-19 (9) are the same as the effect example of the change pattern 018 described above. Will be omitted, and examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 13-19 (20), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D did not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the above-mentioned effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and the character D throws and does not hit instead. An effect image is displayed in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is completed, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (22), the reach state in which the same decorative symbol (“4” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area is established, and “reach !! The characters "" are displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103), and the reach effect is executed. Here, as described above, the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the reach state is established, so that the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) to 13-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state where the image display device 5 is continuously executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. , The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and the reach state is established. That is, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, changes the direction of the variation display, and changes the reach state. It doesn't hold. According to such a configuration, the mode of the variation display of the decorative symbol does not change during the period in which the change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, so that the change suggestion effect can be more noticed.

Although FIG. 13-16 shows a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous, the change pattern is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. .. Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed three times in a row and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed twice in succession. Further, although the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed once or more, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

In the example shown in FIGS. 13-16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, and the active display is always displayed when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. An example in which the display mode changes is shown, but not limited to such a form, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, it is active at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes. For example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided, and the failure mode changes. Even when the suggestion effect is executed, an effect pattern that changes the display mode of the active display may be provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 13-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode in which the expectation of big hit is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode. An example of changing from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a golden mode) has been shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and when a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed. May provide a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes from a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is two or more steps higher (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a golden mode, etc.). Further, the rate at which the display mode changes in two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which character A appears. When is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is high. Is also good. Further, when the change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages without fail.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at the timing before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation that revariates after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is executed one or more times, before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol The change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when n temporary stops are executed, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (a total of n times of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed), and then. By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the n + 1th temporary stop is not executed. In addition, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed even once, the effect pattern in which only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed. May be provided. In addition, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously performed n + 1 times. An effect pattern may be provided that is executed and does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode.

In such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started (character appears) when the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped, and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (character). Takes an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and takes an action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed for the first time. After the re-variation of is started, character B appears and takes an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-variation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period for changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol) from overlapping, the change suggestion effect can be focused on. At the same time, it is possible not to reduce the effect of the effect when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

When executing an effect of changing the variable display direction of the decorative symbol from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started while the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the vertical direction (characters appear). , It is preferable to end the change suggestion effect (the character takes an action to change the display mode of the active display) before changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern to the horizontal direction. For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the first character appears and takes an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative symbol changes from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect from overlapping with the timing at which the change display direction of the decorative symbol changes, the change suggestion effect can be noticed and the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the direction is changed from being lowered.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the change suggestion effect is a display mode of the hold display. It may be a production that suggests that For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 13-16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. , When the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

In the above embodiment, in both the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character acts on the same action (active display or hold display, for example, a ball). An example of performing an action (throwing action) is shown, but not limited to such a form, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. The action performed by the appearing character may be different between the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect. For example, in the success mode change suggestion effect, the active display or the hold display to be changed may be displayed. The action of throwing the ball in the direction of (active display or hold display) is performed, and in the failure mode change suggestion effect, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or hold display (active display or hold display) is performed. You may try to perform a production that does not work).

In the above embodiment, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the more the next change suggestion effect is performed within the predetermined period. The higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the expectation of big hit is shown. .. However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the temporary suspension of the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-ream symbol that will be re-variated (pseudo-ream) after the temporary stop) It may be a period, or it may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol after the re-variation of the decorative symbol (that is, the period between the pseudo-reams). The predetermined period may be a period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right, and all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. It may be a period until the confirmation is stopped.

In the above embodiment, when the change suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of patterns may exist from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is a success mode is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation level May be high. Further, when the change suggestion effect is executed many times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased accordingly. According to such a form, when the player finishes the change suggestion effect of 1, whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interests.

In the above embodiment, the rate of changing the display mode of the active display may be different depending on the current set value (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion of the active display displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do so. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, 3 times or more) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The rate at which the pattern is selected may be high, that is, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous may be high. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, the effect in which the character X with a low appearance frequency appears) is higher than the case where the set value is low (1 to 3). May be made to be executed at a higher rate.

[Other examples of power-on processing]
Next, another example regarding the power-on processing will be described.
14-1 to 14-3 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 and 11 -11 and 11-43 to 11-44, and the processes corresponding to the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIG. 11-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 11-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 11-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. Corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. From the sensor 21TM300, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 14-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) in step S21TM4030). Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), provided that the setting value is changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is not controlled. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 14-2 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 performs a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if any of the cases (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing and the special symbol process processing shown in FIGS. 11-14), the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value. I need to let you. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to change the set value (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power should be turned off once and all the conditions (1) to (3) should be satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3. In the process of FIG. 14-2, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, when the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5 and the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the display of the current set value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (step S21TM1670 in FIG. 11-14) when the normal game process is subsequently started. The security signal will be continuously output until it becomes. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation are started. Corresponding to the end of the control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether the mode is controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also determined regardless of whether the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the above, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security signal is a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the setting confirmation mode end when the setting confirmation mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 14-4 (2). It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 11-14), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (for example). When the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (for example, FIG. 11-14). In the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30,000 ms to 0 ms. In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

A security signal is also output when an error targeting the game stop such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 11-13 is not executed), so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is initially set in the signal output process. It remains set without being converted, and it is possible to continuously output a security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, RAM clear is executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 11-13 is executed), so that in the subsequent signal output processing. The error detection flag is cleared (it is unknown whether or not an error was detected when the power was turned off), and as a result, the security signal output period ends the setting change mode. It is the period until 30 seconds elapse (the period according to the execution of RAM clear).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 14-2, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is directly imaged. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as in steps S21TM1340 and subsequent steps shown in FIGS. 11-13. Specifically, the processes of step S21TM1340 to step S21TM1370 and steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal at the time of turning on the power are executed, and after the interrupt is permitted, FIG. 11- The process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt processing (including the special symbol process processing and the like) shown in 14. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM1370), and the process proceeds to the normal game process.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the recovery from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that (RAM clearing has not been performed).

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the same process as after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) shown in FIG. 11-13. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) to step S21TM1460, a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer described above (step S21TM1465), and a process of steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, a backup RAM at power-on. The process when the data check result of the area is abnormal may be executed, and after the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process) shown in FIG. ..

As shown in FIG. 14-3, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each total for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the game state and the like are initialized (when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the setting change mode ends is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (FIG. 11-14). The information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), and thereafter, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The output of the security signal will be stopped at the timing.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 11-19 and 11-21 described above). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 sets the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing the process according to, for example, the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11-14) is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is one round (taking the random number for determining the normal symbol hit). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery (process after step S21TM1340), but the process is not limited to this form. When it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass). (Depending on the state of the door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery (process after step S21TM1340).

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-3, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). It is possible to control S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and output a security signal in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when an interrupt occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-3, the condition (YES) for the CPU 103 to shift to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is performed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 14-5, by displaying the character "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode ") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If the setting change mode is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the state of the game machine even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. ) To (iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that receives this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is set based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Although it is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected" is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the normal game processing has started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 14-1, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 14-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the setting is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 14-6, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 14-1. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-3.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is entered based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 14-2).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned ON may be performed. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-3 and 14-6, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 14-7. In the example shown in FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 12-2 described above, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. It will change itself.

First, with respect to the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -7 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" is stored in the set value storage area after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 14-6 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, if the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may be set. In this case, the clerk at the amusement park terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 14-7 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 14-7 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 14-7 (1) and 14-7 (1) and (2), when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

In addition to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 14-7, the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 11-37 may be applied. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It becomes a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set value (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A display means having at least a first numerical value display area and a second numerical value display area,
A predetermined effect in which a numerical value is updated to a specific value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area, a special effect for suggesting the predetermined effect, and the first numerical value display area. It is provided with an effect that makes it difficult to see at least one of the second numerical display areas, and an effect executing means that can execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
As the special effect, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area.
After starting the difficult-to-see effect, the numerical value in the numerical display area of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area, which has been made difficult to see due to the difficult-to-see effect, becomes the specific value. Finished the difficult-to-see production,
Specific control means that can execute specific control according to the set value,
A gaming machine further comprising a settable state control means capable of controlling the set value into a settable state.